3VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 1600 A

Transcription

1 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A SENTRON Protection, Switching, Measuring and Monitoring Devices Catalog LV 6 Answers for infrastructure.

2 Siemens AG Related catalogs Low-Voltage Power Distribution and LV. Electrical Installation Technology Protection, Switching, Measuring and Monitoring Devices E866-K8-A-A-76 Low-Voltage Power Distribution and LV. Electrical Installation Technology Switchboards and Distribution Systems Contents Air circuit breakers Molded case circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers Residual current protective devices Fuse systems Overvoltage protection devices Switch disconnectors Switching devices Transformers, Bells and Socket Outlets Busbar Systems Measuring devices and E-counters Monitoring devices Software Switchboards SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking systems SIVACON 8MC, 8MF Cubicle Systems SIVACON 8MR, 8ME Cubicle Air-Conditioning Distribution Boards Terminal blocks E866-K86-A-A-76 WT Air Circuit Breakers LV up to 4 A WT Air Circuit Breakers up to 4 A E866-K8-A-A-76 SIVACON S4 LV 6 Power Distribution Boards E866-K86-A-A-76 SIVACON 8PS LV 7 Busbar Trunking Systems CD-K, BD, BD bis A Power distribution boards Standard configurations Cubicles, supporting structure and enclosures Busbar system Assembly kits for switching devices Covers, modular doors, mounting plates, 9" rack Internal separation Air-conditioning products Accessories Busbar Trunking Systems, Overview CD-K System ( A... 4 A) BD System (4 A... 6 A) BD System (6 A... A) E866-K87-A-A6-76 Catalog CA CA Products for Automation and Drives All products of automation, drives and installation technology, including those in the catalogs listed above. DVD: E866-D4-A-C9-76 Industry Mall Information and Ordering Platform in the Internet: All products of automation, drives and installation technology, including those in the catalogs listed above. Catalog PDF Internet: All catalogs for low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation technology can be downloaded as PDF files. Trademarks All product designations may be registered trademarks or product names of Siemens AG or other supplying companies. Third parties using these trademarks or product names for their own purposes may infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners. Further information about low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation is available on the Internet at: Technical Support Expert advice on technical questions with a wide range of demand-optimized services for all our products and systems. Siemens LV 6

3 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A SENTRON Protection, Switching, Measuring and Monitoring Devices Catalog LV 6 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A The products and systems described in this catalog are manufactured/distributed under application of a certified quality management system in accordance with DIN EN ISO 9. The certificate is recognized by all IQNet countries. VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A 4 Supersedes: Catalog LV 6 8 For further information contact your local Siemens branch office. Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Appendix 6 Printed on paper from sustainably managed forests and controlled sources. PEFC/

4 Siemens AG Innovation is the key to success We continue to invest heavily in the research and development of new technologies. We have our own experimental and test laboratories where we carry out intensive basic research on the climate in buildings and on fire, gas and explosion protection. This gives us the experience and the opportunity to create solutions that continuously flow into our new products and systems. At special test premises, such as airport buildings and hospital premises, we test the interoperability of the individual systems. This empirical data is incorporated into industry-specific solutions that continually set new standards and underscore our claim to technological leadership. Energy-efficiency and environmental protection is our business principle And this business principle applies crosscompany and to each and every employee: We are committed to environmental protection and the careful use of resources. Since 994, we have been involved in more than energy efficiency projects, which have jointly contributed to the saving of around. billion euro in energy costs and reduced the annual CO burden on the environment by approx. 7 t. So, as you can see, intelligent solutions in technical infrastructures benefit not only the owners and operators of buildings, but also those who have nothing to do with them. Customer focus as USP This is not just a soundbite, we make every effort to ensure close customer relations. We have in-depth knowledge of their business and involve them in the development of our innovations. Our skills make us an expert provider of industryspecific solutions and services, a preferred partner during the life cycle of a building - and allow us to enjoy mutual growth with our customers. Siemens LV 6

5 Siemens AG Answers for infrastructure Siemens Industry meets the great challenges of our time head on. With solutions for technical infrastructure in industrial and non-residential buildings, residential buildings and public facilities, Siemens ensures enhanced comfort and energy efficiency in buildings, as well as the protection and safety of persons, property and business processes. As a longstanding and professional partner with all-round expertise in the industry sector, we offer tailored solutions that generate sustainable added value for our customers. Gain a competitive edge - with integrated building solutions Total Building Solutions means more innovation from a single source for enhanced functionality under one roof. When it comes to delivering turnkey buildings equipped with cutting edge power distribution, building automation and safety and fire-protection equipment from a single source, Siemens is in a league of its own. And just to show that we are more than just the sum of our parts, our portfolio includes: Low-voltage power distribution Switchboards, busbar trunking systems, distribution boards, circuit breakers, switch disconnectors, low-voltage circuit protection, building management systems, switches and socket outlets Building automation Heating, ventilation and air-conditioning controls, overall energy solutions offering guaranteed savings Safety solutions Access control, video monitoring, burglar protection, alarm control centers, operation of alarm control centers Fire protection Fire alarms, alerting, evacuation, extinction and complete fire protection solutions Take a closer look at all the options available from Siemens. Check out the opportunities our products provide and discover how we can help you to sustainably enhance your competitive edge. Siemens LV 6

6 Siemens AG The right product for every need Our portfolio comprises switchboards, busbar trunking systems, distribution boards, measuring devices, circuit breakers and switch disconnectors, circuit protection devices, building management systems, switches and socket outlets. The consistency, modularity and intelligence of our components and systems offer you numerous advantages throughout their service life and wherever you are in the world. We deliver trendsetting designs and innovative functions in unique quality, developed in accordance with the applicable international standards. 4 Siemens LV 6

7 Siemens AG Consistent, safe and intelligent power distribution Whether in industrial plants or in buildings: Every technical system depends on a reliable supply of electric power. Even a short power failure may have serious consequences. For this reason, you need products and systems which cope with every eventuality and always keep you on the safe side. Our portfolio is the broadest world-wide, covering everything from switchboards to socket outlets. We will be glad to provide you with extensive support from the initial information to the operation. Convince yourself of the possibilities we offer you. Making efficient use of energy The consistent concept behind the communication-capable components of our low-voltage power distribution range forms a sound basis for the measurement, indication, evaluation and optimization of power flows, thus enabling professional energy management for more cost-effectiveness. At the same time our intelligent building management systems, e.g. for lighting and heating, help to remarkably reduce power consumption. Excellent support As a competent and reliable partner we offer you comprehensive support from initial information, planning, configuration and ordering through to commissioning, operation and technical support. We know the requirements to be met in your area of work and day-to-day business. On this basis we provide you with the type of flexible and efficient help that allows you to concentrate fully on your customers and their needs. Top quality standards world-wide Opting for us puts you on the safe side: Whether it is our workmanship, the materials we use or the operability and functionality of our products we guarantee top standards of quality world-wide. Siemens LV 6

8 Siemens AG New developments RCD modules A residual current module (RCD module) disconnects a circuit whenever it detects that the electric current is not balanced between the energized conductor and the return neutral conductor. Residual current devices and accessories See page /9 Rotary operating mechanisms for operation through side wall of cabinet For lateral operation of VT molded case circuit breakers up to A. Available for right and left side mounting. Rotary operating mechanisms for VT See page /6 Rotary operating mechanisms for operation through side wall of cabinet For lateral operation of VT molded case circuit breakers up to 6 A. Available for right and left side mounting. Rotary operating mechanisms for VT See page /6 6 Siemens LV 6

9 Siemens AG Our added extra Build on a sound basis With our basic and advanced courses, you can lay the foundations for your business success. Expert lecturers provide you with the necessary theoretical and practical knowledge in our modern training center in Regensburg. Dynamic and easy-tounderstand training with multimedia teaching equipment and many practical examples. Available in German and English. If required, we also provide training in-house or in one of our local Siemens branches. Low-voltage power distribution on the Web Visit us on the Internet. You will find comprehensive information on our products SIVACON switchboards, busbar trunking systems, ALPHA distribution boards, SENTRON circuit breakers and switch disconnectors, BETA low-voltage circuit protection, GAMMA building management systems and DELTA switches and socket outlets at: The range of courses extends through low-voltage power distribution to electrical installation technology. You will get to know our entire portfolio of products and their application. Step-bystep we will familiarize you with the entire spectrum of modern installation options, thus opening up a whole new world of business opportunities. For details of our current range of courses, please visit our website at: BTLV Zusatzangebot En.. Comprehensive support We can help you with all your requirements: contact us if you have any queries regarding our products, the planning of your electrical installation or how to obtain technical documentation. Just give us a call: Tel.: +49 (9) 89 7 Fax: +49 (9) Tender specification texts For your support, we offer you a comprehensive range of specification texts: Siemens LV 6 7

10 Siemens AG Much more than a catalog. The Industry Mall. You have a catalog in your hands that will serve you well for selecting and ordering your products. But have you heard of the electronic online catalog (the Industry Mall) and all its benefits? Take a look around it sometime: Selecting Find your products in the structure tree, in the new "Bread-crumb" navigation or with the integral search machine with expert functions. Electronic configurators are also integrated into the Mall. Enter the various characteristic values and the appropriate product will be displayed with the relevant order numbers. You can save configurations, load them and reset them to their initial status. Ordering You can load the products that you have selected in this way into the shopping basket at a click of the mouse. You can create your own templates and you will be informed about the availability of the products in your shopping cart. You can load the completed parts lists directly into Excel or Word. Delivery status When you have sent the order, you will receive a short confirmation which you can print out or save. With a click on "Carrier", you will be directly connected to the website of the carrier where you can easily track the delivery status. Added value due to additional information So you have found your product and want more information about it? In just a few clicks of the mouse, you will arrive at the image data base, manuals and operating instructions. Create your own user documentation with My Documentation Manager. Also available are FAQs, software downloads, certificates and technical data sheets as well as our training programs. In the image database you will find, depending on the product, D/D graphics, dimension drawings and exploded drawings, characteristic curves or circuit diagrams which you can download. Convinced? We look forward to your visit! 8 Siemens LV 6

11 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog Technical Information VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A / General data / Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors /6 Accessories and Components /6 Auxiliary switches auxiliary trip units /7 Manual/motorized operating mechanisms /9 Residual current devices / Connecting accessories / Mounting accessories VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A / Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors /6 Accessories and Components /6 Trip units / Delay device for all VT circuit breakers /4 Auxiliary switches /6 Auxiliary trip units /7 Rotary operating mechanisms / Motorized operating mechanism /6 Insulating barriers and terminal covers /8 Project Planning Assistance /8 Dimensional drawings Siemens LV 6

12 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog General data Overview Versions and accessories Connecting sets Circuit breaker Rotary operating mechanism NSO_8a VT circuit breaker Circular conductor terminal Front connection Rear connection Auxiliary conductor terminal Front connecting bus with increased pole spacing Insulating barriers Lateral rotary operating mechanism Shunt trip unit Undervoltage trip unit Adapter to install on mm DIN rail Lockingtype lever Signal switch 4 Auxiliary switch Mechanical parallel switching 6 Mechanical interlocking 7 Front manual operating mechanism 8 Front manual operating mechanism Lateral manual operating mechanism (right) Lateral manual operating mechanism (left) Non lockable knob Coupling driver Telescopic extension shaft Lockable knob Lockable knob Coupling driver Extension shaft / Siemens LV 6

13 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog Overview Circuit breaker Circuit breaker, -/4-pole versions The - or 4-pole versions of the circuit breakers include: connecting sets for connecting Cu/Al cables ) with crosssections of mm (these terminals are connected to the circuit breaker) insulating barriers set of two mounting bolts (M x ) Selection and ordering data Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Switch disconnector Switch disconnector, -/4-pole versions The - or 4-pole versions of the switch disconnectors include: connecting sets for connecting Cu/Al cables ) with crosssections of mm (these terminals are connected to the switch disconnector) insulating barriers set of two mounting bolts (M x ) Rated current I n Current setting of the inverse-time delayed overload trip unit L Ir DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. A A kg Circuit breakers with tripping characteristic L ) TM ), LI function, -pole with permanently fixed thermal overload trip unit, fixed short-circuit trip unit 4 6 B VT 74-DA6-AA unit.4 B VT 7-DA6-AA unit.4 6 B VT 76-DA6-AA unit.6 8 B VT 78-DA6-AA unit.6 4 B VT 7-DA6-AA unit.47 B VT 7-DA6-AA unit B VT 76-DA6-AA unit.74 TM, LI function, -pole + N, for unprotected N-conductor with permanently fixed thermal overload trip unit, fixed short-circuit trip unit 4 6 B VT 74-EA46-AA unit.6 B VT 7-EA46-AA unit.6 6 B VT 76-EA46-AA unit.6 8 B VT 78-EA46-AA unit.6 4 B VT 7-EA46-AA unit.6 B VT 7-EA46-AA unit B VT 76-EA46-AA unit.6 TM, LI function, 4-pole, for protected N-conductor with permanently fixed overload trip unit, fixed short-circuit trip unit 4 6 B VT 74-EH46-AA unit.6 B VT 7-EH46-AA unit.6 6 B VT 76-EH46-AA unit.6 8 B VT 78-EH46-AA unit.6 4 B VT 7-EH46-AA unit.6 B VT 7-EH46-AA unit B VT 76-EH46-AA unit.6 ) For other connection methods, use connecting sets, see page / ) See pages /6 (-pole) and / (4-pole) ) Thermal-magnetic trip unit * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /

14 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Rated current I n A A kg Circuit breakers with tripping characteristic D ) TM, LI function -pole with adjustable thermal overload trip unit, adjustable short-circuit trip unit Current setting of the inverse-time delayed overload trip unit L Ir DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx B VT 7-DC6-AA unit B VT 7-DC6-AA unit B VT 79-DC6-AA unit B VT 7-DC6-AA unit B VT 74-DC6-AA unit.4... B VT 7-DC6-AA unit B VT 76-DC6-AA unit B VT 78-DC6-AA unit.6... B VT 7-DC6-AA unit B VT 7-DC6-AA unit B VT 76-DC6-AA unit.74 TM, LI function -pole +N, for unprotected N-conductor with adjustable thermal overload trip unit, adjustable short-circuit trip unit B VT 7-EC46-AA unit.6... B VT 7-EC46-AA unit B VT 79-EC46-AA unit B VT 7-EC46-AA unit B VT 74-EC46-AA unit.6... B VT 7-EC46-AA unit B VT 76-EC46-AA unit B VT 78-EC46-AA unit.6... B VT 7-EC46-AA unit B VT 7-EC46-AA unit B VT 76-EC46-AA unit.6 TM, LIN function 4 pole, for protected N-conductor with adjustable thermal overload trip unit, adjustable short-circuit trip unit B VT 7-EJ46-AA unit.6... B VT 7-EJ46-AA unit B VT 79-EJ46-AA unit B VT 7-EJ46-AA unit B VT 74-EJ46-AA unit.6... B VT 7-EJ46-AA unit B VT 76-EJ46-AA unit B VT 78-EJ46-AA unit.8... B VT 7-EJ46-AA unit B VT 7-EJ46-AA unit B VT 76-EJ46-AA unit.6 ) See pages /6 (-pole) and / (4-pole) /4 Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

15 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Rated current I n Current setting of the short-circuit trip unit I I i DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. A A kg Circuit breakers, for short-circuit protection only (tripping characteristic N ),) TM, I function, -pole without overload trip unit, with adjustable short-circuit trip unit 6... B VT 7-DB6-AA unit B VT 74-DB6-AA unit.4... B VT 7-DB6-AA unit B VT 76-DB6-AA unit B VT 78-DB6-AA unit B VT 7-DB6-AA unit B VT 7-DB6-AA unit B VT 76-DB6-AA unit.48 TM, I function, -pole +N, for unprotected conductors without overload trip unit, with adjustable short-circuit trip unit 6... B VT 7-EB46-AA unit B VT 74-EB46-AA unit.6... B VT 7-EB46-AA unit B VT 76-EB46-AA unit B VT 78-EB46-AA unit.6... B VT 7-EB46-AA unit B VT 7-EB46-AA unit B VT 76-EB46-AA unit.6 Circuit breakers with tripping characteristic M ), for starter combinations TM, LI function, -pole with adjustable thermal overload trip units, fixed short-circuit trip units B VT 7-DM6-AA unit B VT 7-DM6-AA unit B VT 79-DM6-AA unit.4... B VT 7-DM6-AA unit B VT 74-DM6-AA unit B VT 7-DM6-AA unit B VT 76-DM6-AA unit B VT 78-DM6-AA unit B VT 7-DM6-AA unit.47 Switch disconnectors Switch disconnector, without overload protection, without short circuit protection 6 -pole B VT 76-DE6-AA unit pole B VT 76-EE46-AA unit.6 ) See page /6 (-pole) ) See pages /6 and / * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /

16 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Overview Auxiliary switches Auxiliary trip units Circuit breakers can be equipped with auxiliary switches, alarm switches, shunt trip units, undervoltage trip units. Shunt trip units can trip the circuit breaker from a remote location. A control supply voltage is required. An undervoltage trip unit trips the circuit breaker automatically when the circuit voltage drops below 7 % U e. The undervoltage trip unit protects motors and other equipment in case of undervoltage. A control supply voltage is required. Selection and ordering data Rated control supply voltage U s DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. AC /6 Hz or DC kg Auxiliary switches and alarm switches Auxiliary switches for signalling the state of the main contacts AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AB unit. AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AB unit. Alarm switches for signalling the tripping of the circuit breaker by an trip unit AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AH unit. AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AH unit. Shunt trip units Shunt trip units can trip the circuit breaker from a remote location. AC/DC 4, 48 V B VT9 -SC unit. AC, V/DC, V B VT9 -SD unit. AC, 4 V/DC V B VT9 -SE unit. Undervoltage trip units Undervoltage trip units trip the circuit breaker automatically when the circuit voltage drops below 7 % Ue AC 4, 48 V B VT9 -UC unit. AC, V B VT9 -UD unit. AC, 4 V B VT9 -UE unit. DC 4, 48 V B VT9 -UU unit. DC, V B VT9 -UV unit. /6 Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

17 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Overview Rotary operating mechanisms The rotary operating mechanism must be combined from the following parts: For rotary operation of the circuit breaker: - VT9 -HE../HF.. knob For operation through the switchgear cabinet door: - VT9 -HE../HF.. knob - VT9 -HG../HH.. coupling driver - VT9 -HJ.. extension shaft, Manual/motorized operating mechanisms For operating through side panel of switchgear cabinet (lateral operation): - VT9 -HE../HF.. knob - VT9 -HG../HH.. coupling driver - VT9 -HJ.. extension shaft Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching The mechanical interlock must be combined from the following parts: - x VT9 -HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanisms (cannot be used with lateral operation) - x VT9 -HE/HF.. knobs (standard) or x VT9 -HE/HF.. knob (parallel switching) Selection and ordering data Version Color DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg Rotary operating mechanisms Rotary operating mechanism not lockable gray B VT9 -HA unit.79 lockable with padlock gray B VT9 -HA unit.79 lockable with padlock yellow B VT9 -HB unit.79 for lateral operation, gray B VT9 -HC unit.7 mounted on the left side, not lockable for lateral operation, gray B VT9 -HD unit.7 mounted on the right side, not lockable Knob not lockable black B VT9 -HE unit.9 lockable with padlock black B VT9 -HE unit.9 lockable with padlock red B VT9 -HF unit.9 Coupling driver for door-coupling operating mechanism Additionally requires VT9 -HE or VT9 -HE black knob degree of protection IP4 black B VT9 -HG unit.4 degree of protection IP66 black B VT9 -HG unit.4 Additionally requires VT9 -HF red knob degree of protection IP4 yellow B VT9 -HH unit.4 degree of protection IP66 yellow B VT9 -HH unit.4 Extension shaft length mm, can be shortened B VT9 -HJ unit. length mm, telescopic B VT9 -HJ unit.9 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /7

18 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Manual/motorized operating mechanisms Mechanical interlocks Version Color DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg The mechanical interlocks additionally require the following parts: x VT9 -HA../HB.. rotary operating mechanisms or x VT9 -HE/HF.. knobs Mechanical interlock B VT9-8LA unit.89 Mechanical interlock for parallel switching B VT9-8LB unit.9 Rated control supply voltage U s DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. AC /6 Hz or DC kg Motorized operating mechanism Laterally mounted motorized operating mechanism For a detailed description see page /. AC/DC4V B VT9 -MA unit.9 AC/DC48V B VT9 -MB unit.9 AC/DCV B VT9 -MD unit.9 AC V/DC V B VT9 -ME unit.9 /8 Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

19 Selection and ordering data Circuit breakers for system protection, only for TM ), starters, disconnectors Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components N Residual current devices RCD modules Rated current I N Residual currents I, adjustable Delay time t d, adjustable Rated operational DT Order No. PS* Weight voltage U e per PU approx. A A s V kg 4-pole 6. instantaneous C VT9 6-GA4 unit pole 6. instantaneous C VT9 6-GB4 unit. Accessories for RCD modules Connection set, short -pole VT9 -GY unit 4-pole VT9 -GY4 unit Connection set, long -pole VT9 -GY unit 4-pole VT9 -GY4 unit ) Thermal-magnetic * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /9

20 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Connecting accessories Selection and ordering data Version Terminals for fixed-mounted circuit breakers Connecting set for -pole version Terminals for front connection set = units Conductor cross-sections S mm Type of connection -- Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg B VT9-4TA unit.4 Terminals for circular conductors x... Cu/Al cable B VT9-4TF unit.8 Set includes a terminal cover, degree of protection IP Terminals for rear connection set = units Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs B VT9-4RC unit. Auxiliary conductor terminals.....; Cu flexible conductors B VT9-4TN unit. Front connection bars.....; Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs B VT9-4ED unit. Terminals for 4-pole version Terminal for front connection set = unit For 4th pole (to be used with VT9-4TA connecting set) -- Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs B VT9-4TA unit. Terminals for circular conductors x... Cu/Al cable B VT9-4TF4 unit. Set includes a terminal cover, degree of protection IP Terminal for rear connection set = unit For 4th pole (to be used with VT9-4RC connecting set) Auxiliary conductor terminals For 4th pole (to be used with VT9-4TN connecting set),...,; Cu/Al-busbars, cable lugs Cu flexible conductor B VT9-4RC unit.8 B VT9-4TN unit. / Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

21 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Selection and ordering data Mounting accessories Accessories Version Conductor cross-sections S mm -pole version Insulating barriers for circuit breakers Included in the scope of supply of the circuit breaker or switch disconnector In case of feed-in from below (power supply connected to terminals, 4, 6), it is necessary to install these barriers on the bottom side For more information, see page /6. Connection DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg B VT9-8CE unit. Terminal protection cover, degree of protection IP Increases degree of protection of the connection point to degree of protection IP, e.g. when used with cable lugs. B VT9-8CA unit. Locking devices for toggle levers Enables locking of circuit breaker or switch disconnector in switched off manually position Locking is possible using a padlock with a shank diameter of up to 4 mm. B VT9 -HL unit. 4-pole version Insulating barrier for circuit breakers Included in the scope of supply of circuit breaker or switch disconnector In case of feed-in from below, (power supply connected to terminals, 4, 6, N), it is necessary to install these barriers on the bottom side For more information, see page /7. B VT9-8CE unit. Terminal cover, degree of protection IP Increases the degree of protection of the connecting point to degree of protection IP, e.g. when used with cable lugs B VT9-8CA4 unit.8 Extension cable for motorized operating mechanism B VT9 -MF unit. Mounting adapter -pole version For mounting on a mm standard DIN mounting rail For dimensions, see page /4. B VT9-4-poleP unit. * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /

22 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information Design Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Installation and connection Main circuit The main circuit is connected with Cu or AI busbars, cables, and possibly cables with cable lugs. For further connecting options, connecting sets can be used (see page /). Generally, conductors from the power supply are connected to input terminals,,, (N) and conductors from the load to terminals, 4, 6, (N). It is possible to reverse the current flow inside the unit (i. e. infeed from below) without reducing the rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity I cu. In case of infeed from below, the units must additionally be fitted with VT9-8CE insulating barriers on the side of terminals, 4, 6 (see pages /6 and /7). We recommend painting the connection busbars. Input and output connectors/busbars must be mechanically reinforced to avoid transferring electrodynamic forces to the circuit breaker during short-circuiting. The power circuit must be connected in such a way that the deionizing space of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is not obstructed (see pages /6 and /7). Recommended cross-section of cables, busbars and flexibars Rated Conductor cross-section S Busbars W x H current I n Cu AI Cu AI A mm mm mm mm 6, , x ; x 6 x 4; x x 4; x 4 6 x ; x x ; x 6 -- Auxiliary circuits Switches, shunt trip units or undervoltage trip units are connected to the terminals of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector using flexible Cu conductors with cross-section.... mm. Conductor cross-sections of main terminals Order No. Maximum permitted current I max Maximum permissible conductor cross-sections S Cable type Sector-shaped conductor, stranded Sector-shaped conductor, solid Round conductor, stranded Round conductor, solid Max. width of busbars and cable lugs Dimensional drawings A mm mm mm mm mm See page -pole VT9-4TF 6 x... x... x... x... /8 VT9-4TA 6 6 VT9-4RC 6 6 /9 VT9-4TN /6,...,/ VT9-4ED 6 /9 4-pole VT9-4TF4 6 x... x... x... x... /4 VT9-4TA 6 6 VT9-4RC 6 6 /4 VT9-4TN /6,...,/ / Siemens LV 6

23 Technical specifications Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Order No. VT AA VT 76-DE6-AA VT AA VT 76-EE46- AA Description Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Circuit breakers ) Switch disconnectors Number of poles 4 Standards EN , IEC 947- Approval marks available, -- unavailable, + in preparation EN ,IEC 947- EN , IEC 947- EN ,IEC 947- Rated current I n A ) ) -- Rated uninterrupted current I u A ) ) 6 Rated operational current I e A Rated operational voltage U e V max. AC 69 max. DC Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 8 Rated insulation voltage U i V 69 Utilization category max. AC 69 max. DC 44 selectivity AC 69 V A -- A -- switching mode AC- (6... A) AC- (... 6 A) AC- A AC- (6... A) AC- (... 6 A) DC- A AC- A Rated short-time withstand current I cw /t -- ka/ s -- ka/ s Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (rms value) ) I cu /U e 6 ka/ac 69 V ka/ac V ka/ac 4 V 4 ka/ac V -- ka/dc 44V (τ = max. ms) 6 ka/ac 69 V ka/ac V ka/ac 4 V 4 ka/ac V Off-time at I cu ms Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (rms value) I cs /U e ka/ac 69 V 6 ka/ac V ka/ac 4 V ka/ac V -- ka/dc 44V (τ = max. ms) ka/ac 69 V 6 ka/ac V ka/ac 4 V ka/ac V Rated short-circuit making capacity (peak value) I cm /U e ka/ac 4 V.8 ka/ac 4 V ka/ac 4 V.8 ka/ac 4 V Losses per pole at I n = 6 A W see table page /4 Mechanical endurance cycles Electrical endurance (U e = AC 4 V ) cycles 6 Frequency of switching cycles/hr Operating force N 6 Front-side device protection IP4 Terminal protection IP Operating conditions Reference ambient temperature C 4 Ambient temperature range C Working environment dry and tropical climate Degree of pollution Max. elevation m Seismic resistance m/s g at 8... Hz Design modifications Front/rear connection / Plug-in version -- Withdrawable version -- Accessories Switches - auxiliary/relative/signal/leading / / / Shunt trip unit/with alarm switch / Undervoltage trip unit/with leading switch/with / / alarm switch Front hand drive/lateral drive right/left / / Mechanical interlocking to the manual drive --/-- --/-- by Bowden wire Motor. oper. mechanism/with oper. counter +/+ +/+ Locking-type lever ) When reversing the circuit breaker connection (power supply connected to terminals, 4, 6, (N) output to terminals,,, (N)), I cu does not change. ) Ranges of rated currents vary according to characteristics, see page /7. ) Permissible load of N pole is %. Siemens LV 6 /

24 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Schematics Circuit breakers with accessories -pole version Switches or Auxiliary starters Main circuit Switches auxiliary alarm or aux. auxiliary auxiliary.y A VT9 -U..Y B VT9 -S TEST J.Y A U< U or.y B 6. 6.VT9 -AB. 4. Q I> 4 6 acc.comp. no. acc.c. no. 6 acc.c. no. acc.c. no. 4 acc.c. no. acc.c. no. acc.c. no. V..VT9 -AH. or.vt9 -AB..VT9 -AB..VT9 -AB NSO Explanations J Q V TEST VT9 -U. VT9 -S. acc. c. acc. comp. VT circuit breaker main contacts trip-free mechanism TEST pushbutton undervoltage trip unit shunt trip unit accessory compartment accessory compartment TEST pushbutton Pressing the TEST pushbutton switches the circuit breaker/switch disconnector off and actuates the auxiliary switches. Power losses (per pole) Rated current I n Power loss P per pole of circuit breaker at maximum current A W Operator panel Indication of circuit breaker tripping When the circuit breaker was tripped by the overcurrent trip unit, the following symbol is displayed: /4 Siemens LV 6

25 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information 4-pole version Switches Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary VT9 -AB. VT9 -AB. VT9 -AB J acc.c. no. 9 acc.c. no. 8 acc.c. no. 7 Switches or Auxiliary starters Main circuit Switches auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary alarm or aux. auxiliary auxiliary J VT9 -AB...4. VT9 -AB VT9 -AB..Y.Y A VT9 -U. A U<.Y or.y A VT9 -S. B U Q N T I> N 4 6 TEST V acc.c. no. 6 acc.c. no. acc.c. no. 4 acc.comp. no. acc.c. no. acc.c. acc.c.. VT9 -AH. or. VT9 -AB...4. VT9 -AB...4. VT9 -AB. NSO_a TEST pushbutton Explanations J Q T V TEST VT9 -U. VT9 -S. acc. c. acc. comp. VT circuit breakers main contacts thermomagnetic trip unit -pole +N ( poles protected, N-pole unprotected) 4-pole (all four poles protected) trip-free mechanism test pushbutton undervoltage trip unit shunt trip unit accessory compartment accessory compartment Siemens LV 6 /

26 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Overview Trip units, -pole version Trip units are integrated in the circuit breakers. Tripping characteristics Circuit breakers are available with four types of tripping characteristics. They are designated with the letters: L - lines For protection of lines with low starting currents VT circuit breakers with characteristic L have a pre-set and fixed rated current value. The circuit breakers feature I n values in a standardized current range from 4 A to 6 A (see Ranges of trip units and their possible settings ). Short-circuit trip units are fixed at 4 x I n. D - distribution For protection of lines and transformers VT circuit breakers with characteristic D have the option of setting to a reduced current in a range of approximately.7... I n. The circuit breakers feature I n values in a standardized current range from 6 A to 6 A (see Ranges of trip units and their possible settings ). The short-circuit trip unit is adjustable. Setting values are shown in the table on page /7. M - motor For motor protection VT circuit breakers with characteristic M have the option of setting a reduced current in a range of approximately.7... I n. The circuit breakers feature I n values in a standardized series of currents from 6 A to A (see Ranges of trip units and their possible setting ). The short-circuit trip unit is fixed at the value of x I n. See page /. Circuit breakers with characteristic L : L I t NSO_ M : t I L I I r N - short-circuit trip unit only VT circuit breakers with characteristic N have a short circuit trip unit only. They feature I n values in a standardized series of currents ranging from A to 6 A. The short-circuit trip unit is adjustable. The values are shown in the table on page /7. Order numbers The order number of a circuit breaker depends on the rated current and on the tripping characteristics. For example: Motor protection with I n = A. The order number is: VT 7-DM6-AA. Setting of tripping characteristics Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L (for circuit breakers with characteristics D and M ). The time-dependent trip unit for overload protection I r (instantaneous) is adjusted in a continuous range using the I r adjustment dial on the overload trip unit. The I r adjustment range is.7... I n. Time-independent trip unit (short-circuit trip unit) I (for circuit breakers with characteristics D and N ). With an time-independent instantaneous trip unit (value of the short circuit current I i ), adjustment is possible within a continuous range. All values are shown in the table on page /7. NSO_48 D : t I r L I I NSO_ N : t L I i I I I i NSO_6 I /6 Siemens LV 6

27 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Derating in accordance with ambient temperature Setting I R and I i for circuit breakers with characteristic D Adjusting I R Adjusting I i Rated Permissible load at current I n A + C + 4 C + C - C Trip units Current ranges of trip units and their possible settings at 4 C Rated VT 7..-DA6-AA VT 7..-DC6-AA VT 7..-DM6-AA VT 7..-DB6-AA current I n Overload Overload Overload Overload protection I r protection I r protection I r protection I r Short circuit protection I i (instantaneous) Short circuit protection I i (instantaneous) Short circuit protection I i (instantaneous) Short circuit protection I i (instantaneous) A A A A A A A A A , , Siemens LV 6 /7

28 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Characteristic L, I n = 4,, 6, 8,,, 6 A t [s] Characteristic D, I n = 6,, A L I n = 4 6 A.. I NSO_49 x I n Characteristic D, I n =, 4,, 6, 8,,, 6 A t [s] Characteristic M, I n = 6,, A L I n = 6 A NSO_ x I n I t [s].. NSO_ t [s].. NSO_ L L I n = 6 A I n = 6 A..... I... I x I n x I n /8 Siemens LV 6

29 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Characteristic M, I n =, 4,, 6, 8, A t [s].... I n = A L NSO_ x I n Characteristic N, I n =, 4,, 6, 8,,, 6 A I Trip units t [s]. I n = 6 A NSO_ I x I n Siemens LV 6 /9

30 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units, with tripping characteristics: class M The tripping time of the -pole trip unit of VT circuit breakers with characteristic M at 7. I n corresponds to the tripping classes A, and according to EN Plate of the trip units with characteristic M Rated current Order No. Class I n 6 A VT 7-DM6-AA A A VT 7-DM6-AA A A VT 79-DM6-AA A A VT 7-DM6-AA 4 A VT 74-DM6-AA A VT 7-DM6-AA 6 A VT 76-DM6-AA 8 A VT 78-DM6-AA A VT 7-DM6-AA Trip units Rated short-circuit ultimate and service breaking capacity of -pole VT circuit breakers in DC circuits Specifications Order No. VT 7..-DM6-AA Rated operational voltage U e DC V Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking ka/dc V; τ = max. ms capacity ) (rms value) I cu /U e Rated service short-circuit breaking ka/dc V; τ = max. ms capacity (rms value) I cs /U e Utilization category (switching mode) DC-A ) in reverse connection of the circuit breaker (input terminals, 4, 6 and output terminals,, ), I cu does not change. Circuit breaker connection for circuits DC V: / Siemens LV 6

31 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units, 4-pole version Trip units are integrated into the VT circuit breakers. It is not possible to deinstall or exchange the trip units. 4-pole circuit breakers are manufactured in the following versions: -pole +N (three poles protected, N-pole unprotected) 4-pole (all four poles protected) The permissible load of the N-pole is % I n. Tripping characteristics The circuit breakers are delivered with three types of tripping characteristics, designated by the following letters: L - lines For protection of lines with low starting currents VT circuit breakers with characteristic L have a fixed value of rated current I (without I n control). The circuit breakers feature I n values of standard current range A, see Ranges of trip units and their possible setting. The short-circuit trip unit has a fixed setting to 4 x I n. Circuit breakers with characteristic L Trip units L I t NSO_ D I D - distribution For protection of lines and transformers VT circuit breakers with characteristic D can be set to a reduced current in the range of approx I n. The circuit breakers feature I n values within a standard current range of A. Setting values are shown in the table on page /. t I r L I N - short-circuit For protection against short circuits only VT circuit breakers with characteristic N have a short circuit trip unit only. They feature circuit breaker values within a standard current range of... 6 A. The short circuit trip unit is adjustable. The values are shown in the table on page /. Order numbers The order number of a circuit breaker depends on the rated current and on the tripping characteristics. For example: Protection of a circuit with I n = 4 A. The order number is VT 74-EC46-AA. Setting of tripping characteristics Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L (for circuit breakers with characteristics D and M ). The time-dependent trip unit for overload protection I r (instantaneous), is adjusted in a continuous range using the I r adjustment dial on the overload trip unit. The I r adjustment range is.7... I n. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit (short-circuit trip unit) I (for circuit breakers with characteristics D and N ). With a time-independent instantaneous trip unit (value of the short circuit current I i ), adjustment is possible within a continuous range. All values are shown in the table on page /. NSO_ N t L I i I I NSO_6 I i I Siemens LV 6 /

32 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Setting I R and I i for circuit breakers with characteristic D Derating in accordance with ambient temperature Setting I R Setting I i Rated Permissible load at current I n A + C + 4 C + C - C Current ranges of trip units and their possible settings at 4 C Rated current VT 7..-EA46-AA VT 7..-EC46-AA VT 7..-EB46-AA I n Overload protection I r Short circuit protection I i (instantaneous) Overload protection I r Short circuit protection I i (instantaneous) Overload protection I r Short circuit protection I i (instantaneous) A A A A A A A , / Siemens LV 6

33 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Characteristic L, I n = 4,, 6, 8,,, 6 A t [s] L I n = 4 6 A.. I NSO_49 x I n Characteristic D, I n = 6,, A t [s].... L I n = 6 A Trip units NSO_ x I n I Characteristic N, I n =, 4,, 6, 8,,, 6 A t [s].... I n = 6 A..... NSO_4 x I n I Characteristic D, I n =, 4,, 6, 8,,, 6 A t [s] L I n = 6 A NSO_ x I n I Siemens LV 6 /

34 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Overview Auxiliary switches Auxiliary switches Location of switches in accessory compartments Auxiliary and alarm switches Function, name and location of switches Location of accessory compartments in a -pole VT circuit breaker/switch disconnector. Order No. Type Switch location Switch function VT9 -AB VT9 -AB VT9 -AH VT9 -AH Auxiliary switch Alarm switch Accessory compartment ),,, 4,, 6 ) Accessory compartment ) Signals the condition of the main contact of the circuit breaker/ switch disconnector Signals whether the circuit breaker was tripped by the trip unit ) In accessory compartment, a VT9 -AB auxiliary switch and VT9 -AH alarm switch cannot be used simultaneously. ) When one of accessory compartments 4, or 6 is already in use for auxiliary switches, a shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit cannot be installed additionally. Location of accessory compartments in a 4-pole VT circuit breaker/switch disconnector. When using one of the accessory compartments 4, or 6, neither a shunt trip unit nor an undervoltage trip unit can be installed. /4 Siemens LV 6

35 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Function Auxiliary switches Switching states (-pole) Switching states (4-pole) Accessory compartment... 9 Switching states of the circuit breaker Lever position Switched on Position of the main contacts VT9 -AB VT9 -AH VT9 -UC/UD/UE.. VT9 -SC/SD/SE.. Accessory compartment...6 Switching states of the circuit-breaker Lever position Switched on Position of the main contacts VT9 -AB VT9 -AH VT9 -S... SP-BC-X... Switched off manually Switched off manually Switched off by the trip unit or INSPECTION button Switched off by the trip unit or INSPECTION button Switched off by auxiliary trip unit Switched off by auxiliary trip unit Switched off by TEST button Switched off by TEST button = contact open, = contact closed = contact open, = contact closed Technical specifications Order No. VT9 -AB, VT9 -AH Rated operational voltage U e V AC 6... V DC 6... V Rated insulation voltage U i V V Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 4 kv Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Hz VT9 -AB, VT9 -AH AC... 6 V DC... 6 V Rated operational current I e /U e AC- 6 A/ V A/... 6 V AC- A/6 V, A/ V,. A/ V A/... 6 V DC-. A/ V. A/... 6 V DC-. A/6 V,. A/ V,. A/ V A/... 6 V Thermal current I th A 6 A. A Contacts arrangement Connector cross-section S mm.... Terminal protection (connected switch) IP Siemens LV 6 /

36 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Design Auxiliary trip units Auxiliary trip units The order number of the auxiliary trip unit depends on the rated operational voltage U e AC/DC 4/48 V AC / V, DC / V AC /4 V, DC V Order No. VT9 -SC VT9 -SD VT9 -SE Shunt trip unit Undervoltage trip unit Location of auxiliary trip unit U e Order No. AC/DC 4/48 V VT9 -UC AC / V, DC / V VT9 -UD AC /4 V, DC V VT9 -UE The specific rated operational voltage of the shunt trip unit is set by jumpers located on the trip unit. The standard setting by the manufacturer is always to the value corresponding to the order number. Schematics L+ L+ B.Y U B.Y VT9 -S. NSO_ A.Y U< A.Y VT9 -U. NSO_6 N- N- One auxiliary trip unit can be installed in accessory compartment Shunt trip unit Undervoltage trip unit Technical specifications Order No. Rated operational voltage U e Rated frequency f n Input power at. U e AC DC Characteristics VT9 -S. AC 4/48///4 V DC 4/48// V /6 Hz VA W U.7 U e : circuit breaker must trip Time before switching off ms Continuous load yes Connection cross-section S,... mm Terminal protection IP (connected trip unit) Location in accessory compartment no. Alarm switch - signals that the circuit breaker was switched off by the shunt trip unit Rated operational voltage U e AC V Rated insulation voltage U i V Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp 4 kv Rated frequency f n /6 Hz Rated operational current I e /U e A/AC V Thermal current I th 6 A Contact arrangement Order No. VT9 -U. Rated operational voltage U e AC 4/48///4 V DC 4/48// V Rated frequency f n /6 Hz Input power at. U e AC VA DC W Characteristics U. U e : circuit breaker can be switched on U.8 U e : circuit breaker must trip Time before switching off ms Continuous load yes Connector cross-section S.... mm Terminal protection IP (connected trip unit) Location in accessory compartment no. Alarm switch - signals that the circuit breaker was switched off by the undervoltage trip unit Rated operational voltage U e AC V Rated insulation voltage U i V Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp 4 kv Rated frequency f n /6 Hz Rated operational current I e /U e A/AC V Thermal current I th 6 A Contact arrangement /6 Siemens LV 6

37 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Design Rotary operating mechanisms The rotary operating mechanism actuates the circuit breakers/switch disconnector when the operator turns the knob, e.g. in order to switch machines on and off. The modular concept of the operating mechanism allows simple mounting on the circuit breaker. Mounting can be done after having removed the accessory compartment cover. An attached drive can be sealed (with sealing wire). The drive and its accessories are ordered separately to match the requirements (see page /7). The rotary operating mechanism is mounted directly on the circuit breaker or switch disconnector. The coupling driver is fixed to the switchgear cabinet door and provides for degree of protection IP4 or IP66. The knob is mounted onto the rotary operating mechanism or onto the coupling driver. The extension shaft is supplied in two versions, standard (length mm - can be shortened) and telescopic (adjustable length mm). It is fitted onto the rotary operating mechanism. The rotary operating mechanism makes it possible to actuate the circuit breaker: Operation from the front panel of the circuit breaker (Fig. ) VT9 -HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism + VT9 -HE/HF.. knob Rotary operating mechanisms Operation through the switchgear cabinet door (Fig. ) VT9 -HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism + VT9 -HJ.. extension shaft + VT9 -HG/HH.. coupling driver + VT9 -HE/HF.. knob Fig. : Rotary operating mechanism with extension shaft, coupling driver and knob Operation through the side wall of the switchgear cabinet (Fig. ) in left- or right-side designs of rotary operating mechanisms for lateral operation VT9 -HD (right) or VT9 -HC (left) + VT9 -HJ.. extension shaft + VT9 -HG/HH.. coupling driver + VT9 -HE/HF.. knob. Fig. : Rotary operating mechanism with knob Fig. : Lateral rotary operating mechanism with extension shaft, coupling driver and knob Enhanced safety for operator The rotary operating mechanism and knob allow operators to lock the circuit breaker into the switched off manually position. The rotary operating mechanism and lever can be locked with up to three padlocks with a shaft diameter up to 4 mm. Every coupling driver prevents the switchgear cabinet door from opening when the circuit breaker is switched on or if it was tripped. By means of the coupling driver it is possible to switch off this locking and to open the door. Locking of the switchgear cabinet door is also possible in the OFF mode of the circuit breaker. It is necessary to activate the locking by means of the knob on the coupling drive and to lock the hand drive arm. Two circuit breakers with rotary operating mechanism can also be provided with reciprocal mechanical interlocking or mechanical parallel switching (see page /9). Siemens LV 6 /7

38 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Rotary operating mechanisms Features Order No. Description Color Permits operator to lock the circuit breaker in OFF mode Degree of Protection Switchgear cabinet door is locked when circuit breaker is switched on switched off manually and locked VT9 -HA Rotary operating mechanism gray no VT9 -HA Rotary operating mechanism gray yes VT9 -HB Rotary operating mechanism yellow yes VT9 -HC Rotary operating mechanism - lateral, grey no left VT9 -HD Rotary operating mechanism - lateral, grey no right VT9 -HE Knob black no VT9 -HE Knob, lockable with padlock black yes VT9 -HF Knob, lockable with padlock red yes VT9 -HG Coupling driver black -- IP4 yes yes -- VT9 -HH Coupling driver black -- IP4 yes yes -- VT9 -HG Coupling driver yellow -- IP66 yes yes -- VT9 -HH Coupling driver yellow -- IP66 yes yes -- VT9 -HJ Extension shaft (can be shortened) VT9 -HJ Extension shaft, telescopic Length mm /8 Siemens LV 6

39 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Rotary operating mechanisms Mechanical interlock and mechanical interlock for parallel switching VT9-8LA mechanical interlock VT9-8LB mechanical interlock for parallel switching Mechanical interlocks make sure that two circuit breakers cannot trip simultaneously, but always just individually. Both circuit breakers may be switched off simultaneously. Interlocking can be used between two VT circuit breakers. Each circuit breaker must be furnished with a rotary operating mechanism at least one of them with a rotary operating mechanism and a knob (see page /7). When using a mechanical interlock it is required to comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and in the table. Mechanical interlocks for parallel switching are for simultaneous switching of two circuit breakers. Parallel switching can be used between two VT circuit breakers. Each circuit breaker must be furnished with a rotary operating mechanism and at least one of them with a knob (see page /7). When using a mechanical interlock for parallel switching it is required to comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and in the table. Dimensions mm X 87. or L 94. or 6 Dimensions mm X 7 or 87. or L to be determined L L X NSO_7 X Arrangement of circuit breakers/switch disconnectors with VT9-8LA mechanical interlock Arrangement of circuit breakers/switch disconnectors with VT9-8LB mechanical interlock for parallel switching NSO_9 NSO_6 NSO_8. or or. or Siemens LV 6 /9

40 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Design Motorized operating mechanism Motorized operating mechanism The motorized operating mechanism is an accessory to the circuit breaker/switch disconnector, by means of which it is possible to switch the circuit breaker or switch disconnector remotely on and off. The modular design of the motorized operating mechanism enables its simple attachment to the circuit breaker (also in addition to a rotary operating mechanism). The motorized operating mechanism is used for both remote and local control of VT -pole and 4-pole circuit breakers. The circuit breaker with attached motorized operating mechanism can be installed on a mounting plate or on a standard DIN mounting rail. The motorized operating mechanism is fastened by means of a bayonet mechanism to the circuit breaker. VT circuit breakers with motorized operating mechanism are intended for industrial, power engineering and infrastructure applications. The motorized operating mechanisms are for direct actuation of the circuit breaker, without a spring storage unit. The motorized operating mechanism can work in local or remote control mode. The local control mode is used, for instance, in case of loss of the control voltage. Local control of the circuit breaker is only accessible after lifting the transparent safety cover off the operating mechanism. This procedure locks the remote electrical control circuits. The lifted position of the cover can be indicated remotely. The circuit breaker is switched on and off by means of the control lever. After returning the safety cover to the original position, the operating mechanism is switched automatically into the remote control mode. After the safety cover was removed, it is possible to actuate an automatic mode selector switch. Under the transparent cover, there is a red LED. The lighting of the LED indicates a failure (failed on/off/wind-up operations). Electronic circuits of the motorized operating mechanism block erroneous control process, e.g. drive cycling after tripping of trip unit or shunt trip/undervoltage trip unit. Lateral operating mechanisms can be locked in off position of the circuit breaker by up to three padlocks with a shank diameter of max. 4 mm. The protective cover of the operating mechanisms can also be sealed. Motorized operating mechanism automatic operation presets The position of the main circuit breaker is indicated by the position of the circuit breaker driver lever under the transparent protective cover of the operating mechanism. The wound up position of the circuit breaker can also be signalled remotely. In the remote control mode, the circuit breaker is switched on and off by an ON and OFF pushbutton. The accessories for the motorized operating mechanism includes an VT9 -MF extension cable. Symbol Description Switched on manually or by motorized operating mechanism electrically Switched off by trip unit, shunt trip unit, undervoltage trip unit or TEST pushbutton Switched off manually or by motorized operating mechanism electrically, wound up state Switch position Automatic operation preset Preset description N N N N Circuit breaker switching off to TRIP position ) Automatic winding up is By trip unit on By auxiliary trip unit By TEST pushbutton Automatic winding up is off Simultaneous winding up and switching on The motorized operating mechanism is out of operation, the red LED is lit. Circuit breaker will be switched to OFF position The motorized operating mechanism switches the circuit breaker OFF automatically. The motorized operating mechanism stays in TRIP mode until it receives an OFF signal. Circuit breaker will be switched to ON position The motorized operating mechanism switches circuit breaker on when it receives an ON signal. The motorized operating mechanism switches circuit breaker on when it receives an ON signal. When receiving an ON signal the motorized operating mechanism switches the circuit breaker off and on again immediately. ) ) Standard factory setting of the switch. ) Pressing the OFF pushbutton causes the motorized operating mechanism to wind up the circuit breaker to position only. / Siemens LV 6

41 Schematics MP control circuit Q L+ Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism ON OFF B Motor drive X 4 M P MP X B HL HL HL HL4 N- MP control circuit, signaling NSO_6 Technical specifications Order No. VT9 -M. Rated operational voltage U e AC 4/48// V DC 4/48// V Rated frequency f n /6 Hz Control pulse length for switching on for switching off 6 ms... ) 6 ms... ) Time for switching on < 7 ms ) Time for switching off < ms ) Frequency of cycles ON/OFF cycles/min Frequency of cycles-successive ON/OFF cycles Mechanical endurance cycles Power input AC VA DC W Starting current A, at AC/DC 4 V 6 A, at AC/DC 48 V 4 A, at AC/DC V A, at AC V/DC V Protection AC 4/48/ V; AC V DC 4/48/ V; DC V Order No. Number of conductors 8 Conductor cross section S. mm Conductor length 6 cm LSN 4C/; LSN C/ LSN-DC 4C/; LSN-DC C/ VT9 -MF ) The values depend on the motorized operating mechanism automatic operation preset, see pages / ff. Explanation of designations MP VT9 -M. motorized operating mechanism M Motor P Gearbox X Connector for connection of control and signalling circuits B recommended connection of control circuitsnot part of MP ON Pushbutton OFF Pushbutton Q motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker HL remote failure signalling (unreliable making or breaking), permissible load max. W ) HL signalling of circuit breaker lever wound up position, permissible load max. W ) HL signalling of opening of the front safety cover of the operating mechanism, permissible load max. W ) HL4 signalling of extension of the operating mechanism locking bar, permissible load max. W ) ) Voltage on terminals, 6, 7, 8 is the same as U n of the motorized operating mechanism. Siemens LV 6 /

42 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism VT circuit breakers with motorized operating mechanism Circuit breaker switched off by motorized operating mechanism (OFF signal) Automatic operation presets no.,, Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism (ON signal). Automatic operation presets no.,, Main contacts Auxiliary switch - NO contact NSO_6 Main contacts 7 Auxiliary switch - NO contact NSO_6 Auxiliary switch - NC contact 7 Auxiliary switch - NC contact t [ms] 6 t [ms] Recommended pulse durations for electrical switching Automatic operation no. Graph description HK > > > 6 6 IMP OFF IMP ON < 7 > NSO_64 Symbol HK NS IMP ON IMP OFF Description Main contacts Alarm switch Make pulse for motorized operating mechanism Break pulse for motorized operating mechanism Switched on NS t [ms] Switched off manually or electrically by motorized operating mechanism (wound up state) Automatic operation no. > > 6 > 6 IMP OFF IMP ON > NSO_6 HK < 7 NS t [ms] Automatic operation no. > > 6 > 6 IMP OFF IMP ON > NSO_66 HK < 7 NS t [ms] / Siemens LV 6

43 Circuit breaker switches off by trip unit or INSPECTION pushbutton Automatic operation no. Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Recommended control pulses for switching the circuit breaker with motorized operating mechanism after it was switched off by trip unit or INSPECTION pushbutton Automatic operation no. 4 6 Main contacts Auxiliary switch - NO contact NSO_67 > ) 6 IMP ON NSO_ Auxiliary switch - NC contact Alarm switch - NO contact Alarm switch - NC contact Automatic operation no Automatic operation no Main contacts 8 Auxiliary switch - NO contact Auxiliary switch - NC contact Alarm switch - No contact Alarm switch - NC contact Main contacts Auxiliary switch - NO contact Auxiliary switch - NC contact Alarm switch - No contact Alarm switch - NC contact 8 t [ms] t [ms] t [ms] accessory compartment accessory compartment accessory compartment accessory compartment accessory compartment accessory compartment NSO_68 NSO_68 HK NS Automatic operation no. HK NS Automatic operation no. HK NS ) If the circuit breaker was switched off by a trip unit, it is necessary to remove the error before it switches on again. Graph description Symbol HK NS IMP ON IMP OFF ) 7 > 6 > IMP OFF ) 7 Description 6 IMP ON 7 Main contacts Alarm switch Make pulse for motorized operating mechanism Break pulse for motorized operating mechanism Switched on IMP ON 7 t [ms] t [ms] t [ms] Switched off by trip units, TEST or INSPECTION pushbutton Switched off manually or electrically by motorized operating mechanism (wound-up state) NSO_7 NSO_7 Siemens LV 6 /

44 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Circuit breaker switches off by shunt trip unit, undervoltage trip unit or TEST pushbutton Automatic operation no. 4 6 Main contacts Auxiliary switch - NO contact NSO_ Auxiliary switch - NC contact Alarm switch Auxiliary trip unit 8 t [ms] accessory compartment accessory compartment Automatic operation no. 4 6 Main contacts Auxiliary switch - NO contact NSO_ Auxiliary switch - NC contact Alarm switch Auxiliary trip unit t [ms] accessory compartment accessory compartment Automatic operation no Main contacts Auxiliary switch - NO contact Auxiliary switch - NC contact Alarm switch Auxiliary trip unit t [ms] accessory compartment accessory compartment NSO_7 /4 Siemens LV 6

45 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Recommended control pulses for switching the circuit breaker with motorized operating mechanism after it was switched off by trip unit or INSPECTION pushbutton Automatic operation no. SV > > ) 6 IMP ON NSO_74 Motorized operating mechanism Graph description Symbol Description HK Main contacts NS Alarm switch SV Pulse for shunt trip unit SP Pulse for undervoltage trip unit IMP ON Make pulse for motorized operating mechanism IMP OFF Break pulse for motorized operating mechanism Switched on Switched off by trip units, TEST or REVISION pushbuttons SP > ) Switched off manually or by electrically by motorized operating mechanism (wound up state) HK 7 7 NS t [ms] Automatic operation no. > 6 IMP OFF > 6 IMP ON NSO_7 SV > ) SP HK 7 > ) 7 NS Automatic operation no. t [ms] > 6 IMP ON NSO_76 SV > ) SP > ) 4 HK 7 NS t [ms] ) Re-switching is only possible after deactivation of the shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit. Siemens LV 6 /

46 TEST TEST TEST Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Overview Insulating barriers and terminal covers -pole version H > Fixed-mounted version Front connection - Terminals,, VT9-8CE insulating barriers or VT9-8CA terminal covers have to be used (when using VT9-4TF connection sets for connecting circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, the terminal cover is included in the connecting set). - Terminals, 4, 6 VT9-8CE insulating barriers or VT9-8CA terminal covers have to be used (when using VT9-4TF connection sets for connecting circuit breaker/switch disconnector, the terminal cover is included in the connecting set). Rear connection - Insulating barriers and covers must be used. Reference Size mm A Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for connections using insulated conductors, cables, flexibars or with rear connection) A Minimum insulation length of bare conductors (using VT9-8CE insulating barriers from mm to max. mm, or by adding additional insulation for the conductors with barriers to obtain at least A value) A Minimum distance: between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated conductors and busbars) between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and busbar between two circuit breakers/switch disconnectors situated vertically above one another between uninsulated connections of two circuit breakers/switch disconnectors above one another C, D, E, F, G H Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall Minimum distance between uninsulated conductors H = VT9-8CE NSO_ ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF B = A = A = A = F = G = B = 7 7 B = E = 7 G = 4 /6 Siemens LV 6

47 TEST TEST TEST Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components 4-pole version H > Insulating barriers and terminal covers Fixed-mounted version Front connection - terminals N,,, VT9-8CE and VT9-8CE insulating barriers or VT9-8CA4 terminal covers have to be used (if VT9-4TF4 connecting sets are used to connect the circuit breaker/switch disconnector, the terminal cover is included in the connecting set) - Terminals N,, 4, 6 VT9-8CE and VT9-8CE insulating barriers or VT9-8CA4 terminal covers have to be used (if VT9-4TF4 connecting sets are used to connect the circuit breaker/switch disconnector, the terminal cover is included in the connecting set) Rear connection - Insulating barriers or covers must be used. Reference Size mm A Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for connection by means of insulated conductors, cables, flexibars or connection) A Minimum insulation length of bare conductors (using VT9-8CE and VT9-8CE insulating barriers from mm to max. mm, or by means of additional insulating of conductors over the barriers at least to the value of A) A Minimum distance: between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated conductors and busbars) between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and a busbar between two circuit breakers/switch disconnectors installed vertically one above the other between uninsulated leads of two circuit breakers/switch disconnectors C, D, E, F, G H Minimum distance between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall Minimum distance between uninsulated conductors H = VT9-8CE NSO_ ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF B = A = A = A = F = G = B = 7 7 B = E = 7 G = 4 Siemens LV 6 /7

48 TEST TEST Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Dimensional drawings - -pole, fixed-mounted version Fixed-mounted version, front connection 7 8 Ø 6.4 ON OFF R4.6 4 x Ø NSO_8 Fixed-mounted version, front connection (VT9-4TF connecting set) ON OFF NSO_ x Ø 6. /8 Siemens LV 6

49 TEST TEST Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Fixed-mounted version, front connection (VT9-4ED connecting set) Dimensional drawings Ø. 4 ON 7 OFF 8 NSO_6 4 x Ø Fixed-mounted version, rear connection (VT9-4RC connecting set). Ø Ø ON OFF 8 Ø 6.4 NSO_ x Ø Siemens LV 6 /9

50 TEST TEST Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Fixed-mounted version, rotary operating mechanism 7 NSO_9 VT VT9 -HA., -HB. VT9 -HE., HF Fixed-mounted version, rotary operating mechanism with adjustable knob NSO_ VT VT9 -HA., -HB. VT9 -HJ. 4 VT9 -HE., -HF. VT9 -HG., -HH. 6 Outside surface of cabinet door (-HJ) (-HJ) Dimensions of door cut-out min. ø7 ø6 /4 Siemens LV 6

51 TEST TEST TEST Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Fixed-mounted version, lateral rotary operating mechanism - right Dimensional drawings NSO_ VT VT9 -HC VT9 -HJ. 4 VT9 -HE., -HF. VT9 -HG., -HH. 6 Outside surface of cabinet door (HJ) (HJ) Fixed-mounted version, lateral rotary operating mechanism - left 7 6 NSO_6 4 VT VT9 -HC VT9 -HJ. 4 VT9 -HE., -HF. VT9 -HG., -HH. 6 Outside surface of cabinet door (HJ) (HJ) 4. Dimensions of door cut-out ø7 ø6 Fixed-mounted version, installation on standard DIN mounting rail (width mm ) 86 ON 4 67 OFF.7 NSO_ Siemens LV 6 /4

52 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Fixed-mounted version and lateral motorized operating mechanism /4 Siemens LV 6

53 TEST TEST Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings - 4-pole, fixed-mounted version Fixed-mounted version, front connection Dimensional drawings 7 8 Ø 6.4 ON OFF R NSO_4 M Fixed-mounted version, front connection (VT9-4TF4 connecting set ). Ø Ø ON OFF 8 Ø 6.4 NSO_6 M 9. 7 Fixed-mounted version, rear connection (VT9-4RC connecting set). ø ø 8 9. ø6.4 M 7 Siemens LV 6 /4

54 TEST TEST Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Fixed-mounted version, front rotary operating mechanism 7 NSO_8 VT VT9 -HA., -HB. VT9 -HE., HF Fixed version, front rotary operating mechanism with adjustable knob 4 4 NSO_ VT VT9 -HA., -HB. VT9 -HJ. 4 VT9 -HE., -HF. VT9 -HG., -HH. 6 Outside surface of cabinet door (-HJ) (-HJ) Dimensions of door cut-out min. ø7 ø6 Fixed-mounted version, lateral rotary operating mechanism - right VT VT9 -HD VT9 -HJ. 4 VT9 -HE., -HF. VT9 -HG., -HH. 6 Outside surface of cabinet door 6 4 NSO_ (HJ) (HJ) 4. /44 Siemens LV 6

55 TEST TEST TEST Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Fixed-mounted version, lateral rotary operating mechanism - left Dimensional drawings 6 NSO_ 4 VT VT9 -HD VT9 -HJ. 4 VT9 -HE., -HF. VT9 -HG., -HH. 6 Outside surface of cabinet door (HJ) (HJ) 4. Dimensions of door cut-out ø7 ø6 Fixed-mounted version, installation on a standard DIN mounting rail (width mm ) 86 ON 4 67 OFF.7 NSO_ Arrangement of circuit breaker/switch disconnectors with VT9-8LA mechanical interlock NSO_9 48. Siemens LV 6 /4

56 T TEST TEST Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Arrangement of circuit breaker/switch disconnectors with VT9-8LB mechanical interlock for parallel switching max.6 min NSO_4 48. Fixed-mounted version and lateral motorized operating mechanism NSO_44 7 /46 Siemens LV 6

57 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog Technical Information VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A / General data / Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors / Accessories and Components / Auxiliary switches Auxiliary trip units /6 Manual/motorized operating mechanism /8 Mounting accessories /9 Connecting accessories / Further accessories VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A / Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors / Accessories and Components / Trip units /4 Auxiliary switches /6 Auxiliary trip units /8 Rotary operating mechanisms / Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching / Motorized operating mechanism /7 Mounting accessories for plug-in version /4 Mounting accessories for withdrawable version /4 Insulating barriers and terminal covers /4 Project Planning Assistance /4 Dimensional drawings Siemens LV 6

58 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog General data Siemens AG Overview Connecting sets 4 6 Switching unit Accessories for plug-in and withdrawable devices Accessories NSO_64a Molded case circuit breaker Plug-in device Withdrawable device Box terminals Circular conductor terminal Circular conductor terminal Multiple feed-in terminal Multiple feed-in terminal Rear connection Front connection Auxiliary conductor terminal Rotary operating mechanism Lateral rotary operating mechanism Mechanical parallel switching Mechanical interlocking Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire Motor operating mechanism Shunt trip unit Undervoltage trip unit Connecting cable Position signalling Keying pins Auxiliary switch NC/NO Auxiliary switch NC/NO Auxiliary switch, change-over contact Auxiliary switch, early Lockingtype lever Sealing inset Additional cover for overcurrent releases Terminal cover Insulating barriers / Siemens LV 6

59 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Overview Switching unit The switching unit includes: Two connecting sets for connecting busbars or cable lugs Insulating barriers A set of 4 installation bolts (M4 x ) The switching unit must be fitted with a trip unit (circuit breaker) or a switch disconnector unit (switch disconnector). For maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads in accordance with the ambient temperature, see page /. For recommended cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexibars for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions, see page /. Circuit breaker The circuit breakers consist of a - or 4-pole switching unit and a trip unit which is available with a choice of different characteristics. Switch disconnector The switch disconnector consists of a switching unit and a switch disconnector unit. Selection and ordering data Switching units Rated current I n Breaking capacity I cu DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. A ka kg -pole version 6 B VT 7-AA6-AA unit.84 6 B VT 7-AA6-AA unit.84 4-pole version, unprotected N 6 B VT 7-AA46-AA unit.84 6 B VT 7-AA46-AA unit.84 4-pole version, protected N 6 B VT 7-AA6-AA unit.84 6 B VT 7-AA6-AA unit.84 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /

60 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog - Accessories and Components Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Selection and ordering data for accessories Siemens AG DT Rated current I n Current setting of the inverse- time delayed overcurrent trip units L I r Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. A A kg Electronic trip units (ETU) Line protection, ETU LP, LI function ) with fixed overload trip unit, fixed short-circuit trip unit 6 6 B VT9 6-6AB unit.7 B VT9-6AB unit.7 B VT9-6AB unit.7 Distribution protection, ETU DP, LI function ) with adjustable thermal overload trip unit, adjustable short-circuit trip unit 4... B VT9-6AC unit B VT9 6-6AC unit B VT9-6AC unit.8 Distribution protection with N-pole protection, ETU DPN, LIN function ) with adjustable thermal overload trip unit, adjustable short-circuit trip unit 4... B VT9-6BC unit B VT9 6-6BC unit.7... B VT9-6BC unit.7 Motor/generator protection, ETU MP, LI function ) with adjustable thermal overload trip unit, adjustable short-circuit trip unit 4... B VT9-6AP unit B VT9 6-6AP unit B VT9-6AP unit.8 Motor/generator protection, ETU MPS, LSI function ) with adjustable thermal overload trip unit, adjustable short-circuit trip unit 4... B VT9-6AS unit B VT9 6-6AS unit.... B VT9-6AS unit. Switch disconnector unit Switch disconnector unit ) B VT9-6DT unit.9 For a description of trip units, see page /. ) Only for switching units VT7-. AA6-AA or VT7-. AA46-AA ) Only for switching unit VT7-. AA6-AA /4 Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

61 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog - Accessories and Components Auxiliary switches Auxiliary trip units Overview The circuit breakers can be equipped with auxiliary switches, shunt trip units, undervoltage trip units. Selection and ordering data Shunt trip units can trip the circuit breaker from a remote location. A control supply voltage is required. An undervoltage trip unit trips the circuit breaker automatically when the circuit voltage drops below 7 % U e. The undervoltage trip unit protects motors and other equipment in case of undervoltage. A control supply voltage is required. Rated control supply voltage U s DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. AC /6 Hz/DC kg Auxiliary switches with single NO contacts AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AC unit. AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AC unit. with single NC contacts AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AD unit. AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AD unit. with double contacts ( x NO) AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AE unit.6 AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AE unit.6 with double contacts (NO and NC) AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AF unit. AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AF unit. with double contacts ( x NC) AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AG unit.4 AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AG unit.4 with change-over contacts AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AH unit. AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AH unit. with leading contacts AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AJ unit.4 Shunt trip units AC/DC 4, 4, 48 V B VT9 -SC unit.4 AC/DC V B VT9 -SD unit.4 AC, 4, V/DC V B VT9 -SE unit.4 Undervoltage trip units AC/DC 4, 4, 48 V B VT9 -UC unit. AC/DC V B VT9 -UD unit. AC, 4, V/DC V B VT9 -UE unit. with leading contact ) AC/DC 4, 4, 48 V B VT9 -UC unit. AC/DC V B VT9 -UD unit. AC, 4, V/DC V B VT9 -UE unit. ) Not to be used with VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism. * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /

62 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog - Accessories and Components Manual/motorized operating mechanisms Siemens AG Overview Rotary operating mechanisms The rotary operating mechanism must be combined from the following components: For rotary operation of the circuit breaker: - VT9 -HA. or VT9 -HB. for frontside operation - VT9 -HE or VT9 -HE black knob or - VT9 -HF red knob For operation through the switchgear cabinet door: - VT9 -HA. or VT9 -HB. for frontside operation - VT9 -HJ..extension shaft - VT9 -HG/HH.. coupling driver for door-coupling operating mechanism - VT9 -HE/HF.. knob For operation through side wall of cabinet: - VT9 -HC for right side operation OR - VT9 -HD for left side operation - VT9 -HJ..extension shaft - VT9 -HG/HH.. coupling driver for door-coupling operating mechanism - VT9 -HE/HF.. knob Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching Mechanical interlocks for fixed-mounted version must be combined from the following parts: - x VT9 -HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism - x VT9 -HE/HF.. knob or - x VT9 -HE/HF.. knob for parallel switching Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire is intended for fixedmounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions Selection and ordering data Version Color DT Order No. PS* Weight kg Rotary operating mechanisms not lockable gray B VT9 -HA unit. lockable with padlock gray B VT9 -HA unit. lockable with padlock yellow label B VT9 -HB unit. for lateral operation, mounted on the right side, not lockable grey N B VT9 -HC unit. for lateral operation, mounted on the left side, not lockable grey N B VT9 -HD unit. Knobs for rotary operating mechanism not lockable black B VT9 -HE unit.7 lockable with padlock black B VT9 -HE unit.7 lockable with padlock red B VT9 -HF unit.7 Coupling driver for door-coupling operating mechanism To be used with the VT9 -HE or VT9 -HE black knob degree of protection IP4 black B VT9 -HG unit.4 degree of protection IP66 black B VT9 -HG unit.4 Additionally requires VT9 -HF red knob degree of protection IP4 yellow B VT9 -HH unit.4 degree of protection IP66 yellow B VT9 -HH unit.4 Extension shaft, length 6 mm, may be shortened B VT9 -HJ unit. Extension shaft, telescopic, length mm B VT9 -HJ unit. /6 Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

63 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog - Accessories and Components Manual/motorized operating mechanisms Version DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg Mechanical interlocks The mechanical interlock additionally requires the following parts: x VT9 -HA../HB.. rotary operating mechanisms, or x VT9 -HE../HF.. knobs Mechanical interlock for fixed-mounted version only B VT9-8LA unit.6 Mechanical interlock for parallel switching for fixed-mounted version only B VT9-8LB unit.6 Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wires for two VT circuit breakers B VT9-8LC unit.9 for one VT and one VT circuit breaker B VT9-8LC unit.9 Motorized operating mechanism with storage spring Degree of protection IP, with locking device for padlocks AC/DC 4 V B VT9 -MJ unit.9 AC/DC 48 V B VT9 -ML unit.9 AC/DC V B VT9 -MN unit.9 AC V/DC V B VT9 -MQ unit.64 Motorized operating mechanism with operations counter AC/DC 4 V B VT9 -MJ unit.9 AC/DC 48 V B VT9 -ML unit.64 AC/DC V B VT9 -MN unit.46 AC V/DC V B VT9 -MQ unit.46 Accessories for motorized operating mechanism Operations counter with cable, length cm B VT9 -MF unit. Extension cable for motorized operating mechanism, wires, length 6 cm B VT9 -MF unit.6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /7

64 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories Overview Plug-in version base The plug-in base includes: - Complete accessories for assembling circuit breakers/ switch disconnectors in plug-in version. - A set of four installation bolts (M4 x 4) for fixing the switching unit to the plug-in base. VT9-4TA connecting sets are intended for connecting the plug-in base with busbars or cable lugs. These connecting sets are included in the scope of supply of the -pole VT 7-.AA6-AA or 4-pole VT 7-.AA46-AA switching units. Other connecting sets are also available. Withdrawable version base In the withdrawable version base the circuit breaker is fixed by side racks, therefore screws are not necessary. Changing of circuit breaker is faster as compared to plug-in version. The withdrawable version base includes complete accessories for assembling circuit breakers/switch disconnectors in withdrawable version. The circuit breaker located inside the withdrawable version base can be moved between an operating position (ON-OFF) and a checking position (withdrawn). Selection and ordering data Plug-in base Version DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg -pole version B VT9-4PA unit pole version B VT9-4PA4 unit. Withdrawable version base same as plug-in base, but with additional side panels and racks -pole version B VT9-4WA unit pole version B VT9-4WA4 unit. /8 Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

65 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog - Accessories and Components Connecting accessories Selection and ordering data Version Conductor cross-section S Type of connection mm Terminals for fixed-mounted circuit breakers Connecting sets for -pole version Box terminals 6... Cu cables, set = units flexibars Terminals for circular conductors DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg B VT9-4TC unit.4... Cu/Al cables B VT9-4TD unit Cu/Al cables B VT9 4-4TD unit.9 Terminals for circular conductors for enhancing termination point protection to IP use the VT9-8CB terminal cover x... Cu/Al cables B VT9-4TF unit. x... 4 Cu/Al cables B VT9 4-4TF unit.6 Terminals for circular conductors, for 6 cables 6 x 6... Cu/Al cables B VT9-4TF unit. Terminals for rear connection set = units Terminals for front connection set = units Included in every supply of switching units Auxiliary conductor terminals,...,; Cu/Al busbars cable lugs Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs, flexibars Cu flexible conductors B VT9-4RC unit.7 B VT9-4TA unit. B VT9-4TN unit.7 Front connection bars for increased pole spacing -- Cu/Al busbars cable lugs, flexibars for increased pole spacing -- Cu/Al busbars cable lugs, flexibars B VT9-4ED unit. B VT9-4EE unit.447 Single terminals for - or 4-pole versions Box terminal set = unit 6... Cu cables, flexibars B VT9-4TC unit. Terminal for circular conductors set = unit... Cu/Al cables B VT9-4TD unit.8 set = unit... 4 Cu/Al cables B VT9 4-4TD unit.8 set = unit x... Cu/Al cables B VT9-4TF unit.68 set = unit x... 4 Cu/Al cables B VT9 4-4TF unit.68 Terminals for circular conductors, for 6 cables 6 x 6... Cu/Al cables B VT9-4TF unit. Terminal for rear connection set = unit Cu/Al busbars cable lugs B VT9-4RC unit. * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /9

66 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog - Accessories and Components Further accessories Selection and ordering data Version DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg Insulating barriers Included in the scope of supply of the switching unit; in case the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is fed-in from below (power supply connected to terminals, 4, 6), it is necessary in most cases to install these barriers also on the bottom side set of two pieces, for -pole version B VT9-8CE unit.77 one piece, additionally needed for 4-pole version B VT9-8CE unit. Terminal cover, degree of protection IP Increases degree of protection of the connection point to IP when using VT9 4-4TD, VT9-4TF, VT9 4-4TF or VT9-4TF block type terminals, intended for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions. -pole version B VT9-8CB unit.98 4-pole version B VT9-8CB4 unit. Locking device for knob B VT9 -HL unit. Enables locking the circuit breaker in switched off manually position. For locking the device, you can use up to three padlocks with a shank diameter of max. 6 mm Bolt sealing inset B VT9-8BN unit. Provides sealing for: trip unit accessory compartment cover terminal cover rotary operating mechanism motorized operating mechanism Additional cover for trip units B VT9-8BL unit.8 Provides protection for trip units Connecting cable B VT9-4PL unit. For connecting the circuit breaker/switch disconnector accessories in withdrawable version (can also be used for plug-in and fixed-mounted version) Position signalling switch B VT9-4WL unit. For indicating the position of the circuit breaker located in the plug-in base or withdrawable version base Coding set B VT9-4WN unit. Prevents insertion of wrong switching unit into the plug-in base or withdrawable version base Pushbutton cover B VT9 -MF unit.4 For motorized operating mechanism / Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

67 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Design Installation and connection Main circuit The main circuit is connected with Cu or Al busbars, or with cables and cable lugs. Connecting sets are available for additional connecting options (see page /9). Generally, conductors from the power supply are connected to input terminals,, and conductors from the load to terminals, 4, 6. But it is possible to exchange this connection (exchanging input and output terminals without limiting rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity I cu ). In case of feed-in from below, the circuit breakers/switch disconnectors must be fitted with VT9-8CE insulating barriers also next to and between terminals, 4, 6. We recommend painting the connecting busbars with different colors. Input and output connectors/busbars must be mechanically reinforced in order to avoid transferring electrodynamic forces to the circuit breaker during short circuiting. The power circuit must be connected in such a way that the deionizing space of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is not obstructed (see page /4). Auxiliary circuits Switches, shunt trip units or undervoltage trip units are connected using flexible.... mm Cu conductors. Motorized operating mechanism and auxiliary circuits of the plug-in base or withdrawable version base are connected with a connector. Recommended cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexibars for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions Rated current I n Permissible cross-section S Busbars W x H Cu Al Cu Al A mm mm mm mm x x 7 x x x x 4 9 x 4 x x x 6 Maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads in accordance with the ambient temperature VT circuit breaker/switch disconnector connection to pole by x mm Cu cable C C 6 C 6 C 7 C A A A A A Conductor cross-sections of main terminals Order No. Maximum permitted current I max Maximum permissible conductor cross-section Cable type Sector-shaped conductor, stranded Sector-shaped conductor, solid Round conductor, stranded Round conductor, solid Busbars and cable lugs Technical information W x H A mm mm mm mm mm See page VT9-4TA x... VT9-4RC x... /47, /8 VT9-4TF VT9-4TC 6... Cu... Cu Cu VT9-4TC VT9-4TD... Cu/Al 6... Cu/Al... Cu/Al 6... Cu/Al VT9-4TD VT9 4-4TD... 4 Cu/Al... 4 Cu/Al... 4 Cu/Al... 4 Cu/Al /4, /8 VT9 4-4TD VT9-4TF x (... ) Cu/Al x (6... ) Cu/Al x (... ) Cu/Al x (6... ) Cu/Al /46, /8 VT9-4TF VT9 4-4TF x (... 4) Cu/Al x (... 4) Cu/Al x (... 4) Cu/Al x (... 4) Cu/Al /4, /9 VT9 4-4TF VT9-4TF 6 x (6... ) Cu/Al 6 x (6... ) Cu/Al 6 x (6... ) Cu/Al 6 x (6... ) Cu/Al /46, /9 VT9-4TF VT9-4ED /47 VT9-4EE /48 VT9-4TN /6,..., Cu flexible conductor Siemens LV 6 /

68 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Siemens AG Technical specifications Description Circuit breakers Switch disconnector Order numbers VT 7-AA6/46/6-AA, VT9-6DT VT 7-AA6/46/6-AA Standards EN 6947-, IEC EN 6947-, IEC Approval marks Number of poles, 4 Rated current I n A, 6,, -- Rated uninterrupted current I u A Rated operational current I e A -- Rated operational voltage U e V AC max. 69 AC max. 69 DC max. 44 Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 8 Rated insulation voltage U i V 69 Utilization category (selectivity) AC 69 V A -- Utilization category (switching mode) AC69V -- AC- B DC44V -- DC- B Rated short-time withstand current U e = AC 69 V I cw /t, ka/ s ka/ s Series U e VT N VT H U e -- Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (rms value) I cu 6 ka 6 ka 6 ka ka ka 6 ka ka ka AC V AC 4 V AC V AC 69 V -- Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (rms value) I cs /U e ka 8 ka 8 ka ka ka 6 ka ka 8 ka AC V AC 4 V AC V AC 69 V Rated short-circuit making capacity (peak value) I cm /U e 7 ka 4 ka AC 4 V 4 ka/ac V, 4 ka/ac 44 V Off-time at I cu ms -- Losses per pole at I n = A W 8 Mechanical endurance cycles Electrical endurance (U e = AC 4 V ) cycles Switching frequency cycles /hr Operating force N 8 Front-side device protection IP4 Terminal protection IP Operating conditions Reference ambient temperature C 4 Ambient temperature range C Working environment dry and tropical climate Pollution degree Max. elevation m Seismic resistance m/s g at 8... Hz Design modifications Front/rear connection Plug-in design Withdrawable design Accessories Switches auxiliary/relative/signal/leading Shunt trip unit/with alarm switch Undervoltage trip unit/with leading switch/with alarm switch Front rotary operating mechanism/lateral operating mechanism at the right/left hand side Mechanical interlocking of rotary operating mechanisms, by Bowden wire Motorized operating mechanism/with operations counter Locking-type knob Bolt sealing inset/additional cover for trip unit / /+ /+ / / / / / / / / -- available -- unavailable + in preparation / Siemens LV 6

69 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Schematics Circuit breakers with accessories -pole version Recommended wiring of the control circuits L+ B Q OFF ON S Plug-in device/withdrawable device 4-4WA SO -4PA Motor drive Auxiliary trips/leading contact Main circuit X A VT9 -U. VT9 -S. A.Y VT9 -U..Y.Y VT9 -AJ VT I> I> A NC C NO S or or or M P U< U U< V TEST Q T T T B MP X 8 PE 6 N X4 YC Ext.oper. counter J A B A.Y Acc. comp. no..y.y WA SO SO -4PA Plug-in device/withdrawable device NSO_89 A B.4. Connecting cable X signal....4 VT9 -AC or VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or. acc. c. no. X. relative...4 VT9 -AC VT9 -AD.4.. Switches....4 ) Only for 4-pole version of VT 7-.AA46-AA switching unit. VT9 -AH auxiliary VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH VT9 -AG.4.4 auxiliary.. VT9 -AF or or or or or or or VT9 -AE.. acc. c. no. acc. c. no. acc. c. no. + Connecting cable NSO_9 MP VT -M.. motorized operating mechanism M Motor P Energy storage device X Connector to connect control circuits X4 Connector for external operations counter S Switch to signal AUTO (NO-C) / MANUAL (NC-C) modes YC VT9 -MF external operations counter B Recommended wiring of the control circuits (not included in the scope of supply of the operating mechanism) ON, OFF Pushbutton S Switch for energy storage (switched on = automatic storage, switch may be continuously switched on) Q Motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker J VT 7-.AA6-AA switching unit Q Main contacts T, T, T, T4 ) Current transformers V Trip-free mechanism TEST Pushbutton to test trip unit VT9-4PA -pole plug-in base VT9-4WA -pole withdrawable version base X, X VT9-4PL connecting cable SO, SO, SO Contacts signalling position of circuit breaker/switch disconnector in plug-in base or withdrawable version base (Position signalling switch VT9-4WL) VT9-4. Undervoltage trip unit VT9 -. Shunt trip unit VT9-4. Undervoltage trip unit with leading contact VT9 -AJ Leading contact acc. c. no. Accessory compartment number Siemens LV 6 /

70 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors 4-pole version Siemens AG Recommended wiring of the control circuits L+ B Q OFF Motor drive ON S Auxiliary trips/leading contact Plug-in device/withdrawable device 4-4WA SO -4PA Main circuit N X 9 7 NC NO 4 A VT9 -U. B VT9 -S. A.Y VT9 -U..Y.Y VT9 -AJ VT I> I> 7 A C MP S or or or M P U< U U< V TEST Q T T T T4 B X 8 PE 6 N X4 YC Ext.oper. counter J A B A.Y Acc. comp. no..y.y WA SO SO -4PA N Plug-in device/withdrawable device NSO_9 Connecting cable X Switches signal relative auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary A B....4 VT9 -AC VT9 -AD or.4. or. VT9 -AH....4 VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH VT9 -AG VT9 -AF..4.. VT9 -AE VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or or or or or or or or or or or or or acc.c. no. acc. c. no. acc. c. no. acc.c. no. + acc. c. no. 4 acc. c. no. acc. c. no. 6 NSO_9 X Connecting cable /4 Siemens LV 6

71 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Overview The electronic trip unit is a separate and interchangeable unit, which has to be ordered in addition to the VT switching unit. By exchanging the trip unit, the range of the rated current of the circuit breaker can be easily changed. Trip units for VT switching units are available for current values of I n =, 6 and A. The ETU LP feature rated currents of 6, and A. The trip units (including regulation of -6%) cover a current range from 4 to A. Tripping characteristics Several different trip units are available. Some have adjustable characteristics (in order to match the protected device and to achieve the required selectivity). ETU LP, DP, MP and MPS trip units are intended for -pole VT 7-.AA6-AA switching units and 4-pole VT 7-.AA46-AA switching units with disconnecting of the N pole. ETU LP trip units t L I ETU MP trip units t NSO_ I r L t r I i ETU MP trip units have more characteristics with adjustable I r, t r and I i. ETU MPS trip units L S I I ms ms I t I r t r NSO_ ETU LP trip units have one type of characteristic and fixed-set I r and I i settings. ETU DP trip units t I r L I I NSO_4 I sd t sd I ETU MPS trip units have more characteristics with adjustable I r, t r, I i and t v. ETU DPN trip units ETU DPN trip units are intended for 4-pole VT 7-AA6-AA switching units with protected N pole. They have more characteristics with adjustable I r, t r, I i and I N. L I t I r I i I N t r NSO_6 I ETU DP trip units have one type of characteristic with adjustable I r and I i. I i NSO_ I Siemens LV 6 /

72 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Siemens AG Function Trip units ETU LP, DP, MP and MPS - description of function Proper functioning of trip units does not depend on the current waveform in the main circuit. The function of the trip unit is supported by a microprocessor, which processes a sampled signal of the power circuit and recalculates it to obtain an rms value. Therefore, the trip units are suitable for protecting circuits where the sinusoidal current is distorted by high harmonics (e.g. circuits with controlled rectifiers, power factor compensators, pulse loading, and the like). All the trip units protect a circuit against short-circuiting and overloading. The tripping characteristics are independent of the ambient temperature. The trip unit is fixed to the switching unit by two bolts. The transparent cover over the adjustment controls can be sealed (with sealing wire). Setting the tripping characteristic The tripping characteristic of the trip units is defined by standard EN For trip units ETU DP, MP, MPS and DPN, the characteristic is adjusted with latched switches located on the trip unit. A visual demonstration on setting the tripping characteristic is available in the SIMARIS design software (Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution). L is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal protection. S is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance short-circuit protection for lines. Intentional delay in tripping of these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selectivity of protective devices. For MPS trip units, the delay can be set at,, or ms. I is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against ultimate short-circuit currents. For MP trip units, the time delay can be set at or ms.. Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L The time-dependent trip unit ETU DP is adjusted with the I r switch. The I r switch adjusts the rated current of the circuit breaker, with the characteristic shifting on the current axis. The trip unit is set to one type of characteristic. The time-dependent trip units ETU MP, MPS and DPN are adjusted with two switches, I r and t r. The first (I r ) switch adjusts the circuit breaker s rated current. The characteristic moves along the current axis. By turning the other switch (t r ), the time is adjusted after which the circuit breaker will trip while passing through 7. I r. The tripping characteristic thus moves on the time axis. Using the t r switch, it is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics. ETU MP and MPS trip units have 4 characteristics for motor protection and 4 characteristics for protecting lines. Breaking times correspond to trip unit classes,,. By changing t r, it is possible to select the trip unit characteristic according to the required motor starting characteristic (light, medium, heavy or very heavy starting). ETU DPN trip units have 8 characteristics for protecting lines or transformers. It is not possible to turn the circuit breaker back on immediately after the time-dependent trip unit has been actuated and the circuit breaker has tripped. The trip unit must be allowed to cool off (it has a thermal memory). The thermal memory can be disabled by turning the switch from the normal T t position to the T position. In the T position the time-dependent trip unit remains active, and only its thermal memory is deactivated. Switching off the thermal memory should be used only in well-justified cases, and with the knowledge that there could be rising temperature in the protected device, causing repeated tripping.. Delayed time-independent trip unit S This trip unit characteristic is available only in ETU MPS trip units. It is used to set up a selective cascade of circuit breakers. It is set up using parameters I sd and t v. I sd is an n-multiple of current I r (I sd = n I r ). I sd is a short-circuit current that, within the span of I i to I i, will trip the circuit breaker with delay t v, where t v is a delay set up for switching off the trip unit. The delayed timeindependent trip unit actuates the circuit breaker if the current in the circuit reaches at least the preset n-multiple and lasts at least the preset delay time t v.. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit (short-circuit trip unit) I For trip units ETU DP, MP and DPN, the time-independent instantaneous trip unit is adjusted with the I rm switch. The I rm switch is used for setting up the short-circuit current that, when reached or exceeded, causes instantaneous tripping of the circuit breaker. /6 Siemens LV 6

73 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Tripping characteristics of ETU LP, DP, MP, MPS and DPN trip units with load The tripping characteristic from the cold state indicates the tripping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the circuit breaker. The tripping characteristic tripped from warm state indicates the tripping times during which it is assumed that, before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic trip units are independent of the ambient temperature and are plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of a trip unit in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a steady state, as shown in the following diagram. The steady state is a period during which the characteristic does not change. If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least minutes, the tripping times will be cut by a half. If the load is less than 7% of I r, the tripping time does not become shorter. k [-] Decrease of tripping time with load T - When tripping from the warm state, the tripping time of the characteristic is cut short during the standstill time t u by coefficient k. Thermal standstill time of the characteristics For all trip units, the thermal standstill time is t u min. During this time, the tripping time t v is cut short from the cold-state characteristic by the coefficient k. The real tripping time is t s = k x t v Example I r [%] The shortening constant can be read from the graph. With steady current 8% of I r the real tripping time will be shortened to: t s =.74 x t v k [ ] time shortening coefficient I r [A] adjusted rated current of the trip unit t v [s] tripping time of the trip unit derived from the characteristic t s [s] real tripping time of the trip unit tripped from warm state t u [s] standstill period for particular characteristics Trip units are preset by the manufacturer I r = min Restart = T (t) I i = min, ms t r = TV, t (t), min NSO_7 T I sd = ms, min I N =. I r Trip units ETU LP - Lines protection Provides protection for lines with low starting currents The VT9..-6AB trip unit is intended only for VT7 -.AA6-AA or VT7 -.AA46-AA switching unit. The LP trip unit has a thermal memory that cannot be disabled. The rated currents of the trip units are given by their order numbers and correspond to a standardized series of currents (see specifications table). The short-circuit trip unit is fixed-set at 4 I n. One of the advantages of the LP trip unit is its simplicity, because it does not require any adjustment. Therefore, it is intended for less complicated applications. Specifications Order No. Rated current I n Instantaneous short circuit protection I r A A VT9 6-6AB 6 64 VT9-6AB 8 VT9-6AB Tripping characteristics t [s] I r L I n = 6 A I n = A I n = A I i I NSO_8 x I n Siemens LV 6 /7

74 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Siemens AG Trip units ETU DP - Distribution protection Provides protection for lines and transformers The VT9..-6AC trip unit is intended only for VT7-.AA6-AA or VT7-.AA46-AA switching units. Operation of the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch on the front panel from position T (t) to position T (). After disabling the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains active. The operational state 7% of I r is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green in a. s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load larger than % of I r, this LED will turn red and will begin to blink red just before tripping. Located on the lower part of the DP trip unit cover are two photocells for communicating with the prospective signalling unit. DP trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed for practical purposes that provide for optimal exploitation of transformers up to. I r. DP trip units offer simple adjustment of the tripping characteristics. Set-up includes only the rated current and the short-circuit tripping level at 4 I r or 8 I r. Tripping characteristics t [s] min. L I n = A I n = 6 A I n = A I n = A I n = 6 A.. I n = A..... I r max. x 4x 4x 4x 8x 4x 8x 4x 8x 4x 8x 8x 8x NSO_9 x I n I i I i I i I r I I i Adjustable specifications Order No. Rated current I n A Overload protection Restart Instantaneous I r short circuit protection I i A VT9-6AC 6 T () 4xl r 6 T (t) 8xl r VT9 6-6AC 6 T () 4xl r T (t) 8xl r VT9-6AC 7 T () 4xl r 8 T (t) 8xl r 9 4 /8 Siemens LV 6

75 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Trip units ETU MP - Motor protection Provides protection for motors and generators Can protect lines and transformers The VT9..-6AP trip unit is intended only for VT7-.AA6- AA and VT7-.AA46-AA switching units. The operation of the MP trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The MP trip unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch on the front panel from position T (t) to position T (). After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains active. When one or two phases fail (due to current greater than I r in the remaining phases), in the M-characteristic mode, the switch will open with a 4 s delay (so called undercurrent tripping). Another parameter for adjusting the MP trip unit consists of the rated current and short-circuit tripping level. The time delay of the short-circuit trip unit can be set to or ms. The operational state 7% of I r is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green in a. s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load larger than % of I r, this LED will turn red and will begin to blink red just before tripping. Located on the lower part of the MP trip unit cover are two photocells for communicating with the prospective signalling unit. MP trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed for practical purposes that provide for optimal exploitation of transformers up to. I r. A total of 8 characteristics can be set on the trip unit. Mode M provides 4 characteristics suitable for protecting motors and mode TV provides 4 characteristics for protecting transformers and lines. The shape of each characteristic can be changed with a selector switch. Adjustable specifications Order No. Rated Overload t r (7, x I r ) Restart Instantaneous short current I n protection I r circuit protection I i A A s ka ms 4 (TV ) T (), 4 (TV ) T (, 46 (TV ) T (,4 48 (TV ) T (),6 (M ) T (,8 (M ) T (), 8 8 (M 8) T (, VT9-6AP 6 (M ) T (, 6 (M ) T (t), 69 8 (M 8) T (t), 7 (M ) T (t), 76 (M ) T (t),8 8 (TV ) T (t),6 87 (TV ) T (t),4 9 (TV ) T (t), (TV ) T (t), 6 (TV ) T (), 69 (TV ) T (,4 7 (TV ) T (,6 8 (TV ) T (), 87 (M ) T (, 9 (M ) T (),6 8 (M 8) T (, VT9 6-6AP 6 (M ) T (),4 (M ) T (t), 8 (M 8) T (t), (M ) T (t),6 (M ) T (t), 7 (TV ) T (t), 44 (TV ) T (t),6 (TV ) T (t),4 6 (TV ) T (t), (TV ) T (), (TV ) T (, (TV ) T (,7 (TV ) T (), 7 (M ) T (, 44 (M ) T (), 6 8 (M 8) T (, VT9-6AP 7 (M ) T (), 8 (M ) T (t), 9 8 (M 8) T (t), (M ) T (t), (M ) T (t), (TV ) T (t), (TV ) T (t),7 4 (TV ) T (t), (TV ) T (t), Siemens LV 6 /9

76 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Tripping characteristics Siemens AG t [s] min. L I r max. I r t r ms ms I i t r TV t [s] L min. I r max. I r t r ms ms I i t r NSO_ M I n = A I n = 6 A I n = A I n = A I n = 6 A.. I n = A x I n I I i [ka] I i [ka] I i [ka] I n = A I n = 6 A I n = A I n = A I n = 6 A.. I n = A x I n I I i [ka] I i [ka] I i [ka] / Siemens LV 6

77 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Trip units ETU MPS - Motor protection with timing selectivity Provides protection for motors and generators Can protect lines and transformers Enables adjusting time delay of time-independent trip unit The VT9..-6AS trip unit is intended for VT7-.AA6- AA or VT7-.AA46-AA switching units. The operation of the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch on the front panel from position T (t) to position T (). After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains active. When one or two phases fail (due to current greater than I r in the remaining phases), in the M-characteristic mode, the switch will open with a 4 s delay (so called undercurrent trip unit). Another parameter for adjusting the MPS trip unit is the rated current and tripping level of the delayed short-circuit trip unit. The time delay (t sd ) can be set on the delayed short-circuit trip unit at,, or ms. The operational state 7% of I r is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green in a. s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load larger than % of I r, this LED will turn red and will begin to blink red just before tripping. Located on the lower part of the MPS trip unit cover are two photocells for communicating with the prospective signalling unit. MPS trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed for practical purposes that provide for optimal exploitation of transformers up to. I r. A total of 8 characteristics can be set on the trip unit. Mode M provides 4 characteristics suitable for protecting motors, and mode TV provides 4 characteristics for protecting transformers and lines. The shape of each characteristic can be changed with a selector switch. Adjustable specifications Order No. Rated Overload t sd (7. x I r ) Restart Short circuit protection current I n protection I r (short time de- layed) I i A A S ka ms 4 (TV ) T () 4 (TV ) T () 46 (TV ) T () 7 48 (TV ) T () 9 (M ) T () (M ) T () 8 8 (M 8) T () 7 VT9-6AS 6 (M ) T () 9 6 (M ) T (t) 69 8 (M 8) T (t) 7 (M ) T (t) 7 76 (M ) T (t) 9 8 (TV ) T (t) 87 (TV ) T (t) 9 (TV ) T (t) 7 (TV ) T (t) 9 6 (TV ) T () 69 (TV ) T () 7 (TV ) T () 7 8 (TV ) T () 9 87 (M ) T () 9 (M ) T () 8 (M 8) T () 7 VT96-6AS 6 (M ) T () 9 (M ) T (t) 8 (M 8) T (t) (M ) T (t) 7 (M ) T (t) 9 7 (TV ) T (t) 44 (TV ) T (t) (TV ) T (t) 7 6 (TV ) T (t) 9 (TV ) T () (TV ) T () (TV ) T ( 7 (TV ) T ()) 9 7 (M ) T () 44 (M ) T () 6 8 (M 8) T () 7 VT9-6AS 7 (M ) T () 9 8 (M ) T (t) 9 8 (M 8) T (t) (M ) T (t) 7 (M ) T (t) 9 (TV ) T (t) (TV ) T (t) 4 (TV ) T (t) 7 (TV ) T (t) 9 Siemens LV 6 /

78 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Tripping characteristics Siemens AG t [s] I n = A I n = 6 A I n = A min. L S I r L t v [ms] max. x Ir x Ir I NSO_... x I n I r t r I sd t v I n 7 x Ir I sd 9 x Ir I r t r I sd t v In = A In = 6 A t r [s] In = A I TV t [s] min. n 8 I n = A I n = 6 A I n = A L S I r t v [ms] max. x Ir x Ir 7 x Ir 8 NSO_... x I n I r t r I sd t v I n I sd 9 x Ir I r t r I sd t v In = A In = 6 A t r [s] In = A I M / Siemens LV 6

79 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Trip units ETU DPN - Distribution protection with protected N pole Provides protection for lines and transformers in TN-C-S and TN-S networks The VT9..-6BC trip unit is intended only for the VT 7-.AA6-AA switching unit. The operation of the DPN trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The DPN trip unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch located on the front panel from position T (t) to position T (). After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains active. The rated current I r, delay for switching off the trip unit at 7. I r, and the tripping level of the short-circuit tripping can be adjusted. The operational state is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green in a. s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load larger than % of I r, this LED will turn red and will begin to blink red just before tripping. Located on the lower part of the DPN trip unit cover are two photocells for communicating with the prospective signalling unit. The current of the fourth pole (N pole) is adjusted using the IN switch as a multiple of the I r current. Measuring of current on the fourth pole can be disabled by turning the button to the OFF position. Tripping characteristics t [s].... I N N IN =. x Ir L.7 x Ir I n = A I n = 6 A I n = A x Ir I r min. max. x Ir NSO_..... x I n I N I r t r I n I i 4 x Ir 7 x Ir I N 9 x Ir I r I I i t r [S] t r I i Adjustable specifications Order No. Rated Overload t R (7, x I r ) Restart Instantaneous short current I n protection I r circuit protection I i A A S ka ms 4 T () 4 T () 46 T () 7 48 T () 9 T () T () 8 T () 7 VT9-6BC 6 T ( 9 6 T (t) 69 T (t) 7 T (t) 7 76 T (t) 9 8 T (t) 87 T (t) 9 T (t) 7 T (t) 9 6 T () 69 T () 7 T () 7 8 T () 9 87 T () 9 T () T () 7 VT9 6-6BC 6 T () 9 T (t) T (t) T (t) 7 T (t) 9 7 T (t) 44 T (t) T (t) 7 6 T (t) 9 T () T () T () 7 T () 9 7 T () 44 T () 6 T () 7 VT9-6BC 7 T () 9 8 T (t) 9 T (t) T (t) 7 T (t) 9 T (t) T (t) 4 T (t) 7 T (t) 9 Siemens LV 6 /

80 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Auxiliary switches Siemens AG Overview Order number according to contact arrangement Arrangement of contacts Order No. Number of contacts Contact types VT9 -AC () NO VT9 -AE () NO VT9 -AD () NC VT9 -AG () NC VT9 -AF () + NC + NO VT9 -AH () NC + NO Functions and names of switches according to their location in accessory compartments Location of accessory compartments in VT circuit breakers Accessory Switch name Switch function compartment Signalling Signalling switch to indicate the state of the circuit breaker by the trip unit Relative Relative switch to indicate tripping of the circuit breaker by trip units, TEST pushbutton or by OFF pushbutton on the motorized operating mechanism, (4,, 6) ) Auxiliary Auxiliary switch to indicate the position of the main contacts Leading Leading switch to make/break in advance of the main contacts ) Accessory compartments 4,, 6 for 4-pole version only. Function States of auxiliary switches located in the switching unit accessory compartments Circuit breaker state Accessory compartment (4... 6) ) and and and Toggle position of circuit breaker State of the main contacts VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AJ VT9 -U. VT9 -AG VT9 -AF VT9 -AE VT9 -AH VT9 -AH VT9 -AH Switched on Switched off manually or electrically by operating mechanism Switched off by trip unit Switched off by auxiliary trip unit or by TEST button or the trip pushbutton on the motorized operating mechanism = contact open, = contact closed ) Accessory compartments 4,, 6 for 4-pole version only. /4 Siemens LV 6

81 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components State of switches located in the switching unit accessory compartments Auxiliary switches Switches early contact signaling relative auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary.y.y.y.y4 VT9 -AJ acc. c. no VT9 -AC or. VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or.4. or VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or.4. or... VT9 -AG VT9 -AF or or or..4.. VT9 -AE VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH acc. c. no. acc. c. no. acc. c. no. acc. c. no. + acc. c. no. 4 acc. c. no. acc. c. no. 6 or or or or or or 6. NSO_4 Technical specifications Order No. VT9 -A. VT9 -A. ) VT9 -AJ VT9 -AH VT9 -AH ) Rated operational voltage U e V AC 6... AC... 6 AC AC 4... AC..6 DC 6... DC... 6 DC 4... DC...6 Rated isolation voltage U i V Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Rated operational current I e /U e AC A/ V AC- 6A/4V,4A/4V,.4....A/ V A/AC V. A/AC V -- A/ V DC A/DC 6 V DC-.4 A/4 V,.4..../6 V --. A/DC V --. A/4 V,. A/ V Thermal current I th A, Arrangement of contacts,,,,,, Connector cross-section S mm.... Terminal protection (connected switch) IP ) VT9 -A. is not suitable for controlling electromagnetic loads Siemens LV 6 /

82 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Auxiliary trip units Siemens AG Overview Order number of shunt trip units according to the rated operating voltage Order No. VT9 -SC VT9 -SD VT9 -SE U e AC/DC 4, 4, 48 V AC/DC V AC, 4, V/DC V Order number of undervoltage trip units according to the rated operating voltage Order No. VT9 -UC VT9 -UD VT9 -UE Rated operating voltage U e AC/DC 4, 4, 48 V AC/DC V AC, 4, /DC V Location of accessory compartments in VT circuit breakers The particular rated operating voltage of the shunt trip unit is set up by jumpers located on the right hand side in the trip unit. Default setting is always the maximum value. Function Shunt trip units Circuit breaker switched off by the shunt trip unit Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breaker Main contacts Auxiliary switch Auxiliary switch Relative switch accessory compartment NSO_6 Circuit breaker state Switched on Switched off by trip units, or by TEST button or by the trip pushbutton on the motorized operating mechanism Switched off manually or electrically by the operating mechanism L+ L+ Toggle positions of circuit breaker.4... Relative switch t [ms] accessory compartment A VT9 -O. A A.Y U< or U< A.Y VT9 -S. NSO_ N- N- /6 Siemens LV 6

83 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Auxiliary trip units Undervoltage trip units Circuit breaker switched off by the undervoltage trip unit Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breaker Main contacts Auxiliary switch Auxiliary switch Relative switch Relative switch Early switch accessory compartment accessory compartment NSO_ Circuit breaker state Switched on Switched off by trip units, by TEST button or by the trip pushbutton on the motorized operating mechanism Switched off manually or electrically by operating mechanism Arrangement, number and type of contacts Toggle positions of circuit breakers Arrangement of contacts Number of contacts Contact types NC + NC + NO NO L+ L+.Y.Y4.Y.Y4.Y.Y.Y.Y Early switch t [ms] accessory compartment A VT9 -O. A.Y U< or U< A A.Y VT9 -S. NSO_ N- N- Technical specifications Shunt trip units Order No. VT9 -S. Rated operating voltage U e V AC 4, 4, 48,,, 4, DC 4, 4, 48,, Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Input power at. U e AC < VA DC < W Functional description U,7U e the circuit breaker must trip Time to switch-off ms Continuous load Yes Connection cross-section S mm.... Terminal protection IP (connected trip unit) Location in accessory compartment No. ) Cannot be used in combination with VT9-M.. motorized operating mechanism. Undervoltage trip units Order No. VT9 -U. VT9 -U. ) Rated operating voltage U e V AC 4, 4, 48,,, 4, DC 4, 4, 48,, Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Input power at. U e VA W AC < DC < Functional description ) U.8 U e (circuit breaker can switch on) U. U e (the circuit breaker must trip) Time to switch off ms Continuous load Yes Connector cross-section S mm.... Terminal protection IP (connected trip unit) Location in accessory compartment No. Leading switch Rated operating voltage U e V -- AC Rated frequency f n Hz -- /6 Rated operating current I e /U e V -- AC A/9 Arrangement of contacts --,, Connector cross-section S mm Terminal protection (connected trip unit) -- IP Siemens LV 6 /7

84 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Rotary operating mechanisms Siemens AG Overview Rotary operating mechanism The following components of the rotary operating mechanisms are required: To switch the switching unit: - VT9 -HE or VT9 -HE black knob - VT9 -HF red knob To switch the switching unit through the switchgear cabinet door: - VT9 -HJ..extension shaft - VT9 -HG/HH.. coupling driver for door-coupling operating mechanism - VT9 -HE/HF.. knob Design Fig. : Rotary operating mechanism with knob Fig. : Rotary operating mechanism with extension shaft, coupling driver and knob The rotary operating mechanism makes it possible to actuate the circuit breaker by turning a knob, e.g. in order to switch machines on and off. The modular concept of the operating mechanisms allows simple mounting on the switching unit after the accessory compartment cover is removed. The operating mechanism and its accessories must be ordered separately, (see page /6). The rotary operating mechanism is attached to the switching unit of the circuit breaker The coupling driver is attached to the switchgear door. It provides degree of protection IP4 or IP66 The knob is placed on the rotary operating mechanism or on the coupling driver The extension shaft is available in two versions, standard (length 6 mm - can be shortened) and telescopic (adjustable length mm). Mechanical interlocks and mechanical interlock for parallel switching Mechanical interlocks for fixed-mounted versions require the following components: - x VT9 -HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism - x VT9 -HE/HF.. knob Mechanical interlocking with Bowden wire is suitable for fixedmounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions Mechanical interlocking with Bowden wire requires the following components: - x VT9 -HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism - x VT9 -HE/HF.. knob The rotary operating mechanism makes it possible to actuate the circuit breaker: Operation from the front panel of the circuit breaker (Fig. ) VT9 -HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism + VT9 -HE/HF.. knob Operation through the switchgear cabinet door (Fig. ) VT9 -HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism + VT9 -HJ.. extension shaft + VT9 -HE/HF.. knob + VT9 -HG/HH.. coupling driver Operation through side wall of switchgear cabinet VT9 -HC/HD.. rotary operating mechanism + VT9 -HJ.. extension shaft + VT9 -HE/HF.. knob + VT9 -HG/HH.. coupling driver Enhanced safety for operator: The rotary operating mechanism and knob allow operators to lock the circuit breaker in position switched off manually. The unit and knob of the rotary operating mechanism can be locked by three padlocks with a shank diameter up to 6 mm Each coupling driver prevents the cabinet door from being opened when the circuit breaker is in on-state or after tripping. Types VT9-HG and VT9-HG prevent the cabinet door from being opened when the circuit breaker is in the state "switched off manually" and when the rotary operating mechanism knob is locked out. Two circuit breakers with rotary operating mechanisms can be provided with mechanical interlocking or with parallel mechanical switching (see page /). /8 Siemens LV 6

85 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Rotary operating mechanisms Features Order No. Description Color Permits operator to lock the circuit breaker in OFF mode Degree of protection Switchgear cabinet door is locked when circuit breaker is switched on switched off manually and locked VT9 -HA Rotary operating mechanism grey no VT9 -HA Rotary operating mechanism grey yes VT9 -HB Rotary operating mechanism yellow yes VT9 -HC Rotary operating mechanism grey no VT9 -HD Rotary operating mechanism grey no VT9 -HE Knob black no VT9 -HE Knob, lockable with padlock black yes VT9 -HF Knob, lockable with padlock red yes VT9 -HG Coupling driver black -- IP4 yes yes -- VT9 -HG Coupling driver yellow -- IP4 yes yes -- VT9 -HH Coupling driver black -- IP66 yes no -- VT9 -HH Coupling driver yellow -- IP66 yes no -- VT9 -HJ Extension shaft, can be shortened VT9 -HJ Extension shaft, telescopic Length mm Siemens LV 6 /9

86 RP-BD-CK PS PS PS SP SV RP-BD-CK PS PS PS SP SV RP-BD-CK VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching Siemens AG Function VT9-8LA Mechanical interlocking VT9-8LB Mechanical parallel switching Mechanical interlocks make sure that two circuit breakers cannot trip simultaneously, but always just individually. Both circuit breakers may be switched off simultaneously. Interlocking can be used between two VT circuit breakers or between one VT and one VT circuit breaker. Both circuit breakers must be furnished with rotary operating mechanisms (at least one of them with a rotary operating mechanism and knob). When using a mechanical interlock it is required to comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and in the table. Mechanical interlocks for parallel switching are for simultaneous switching of two circuit breakers. Parallel switching can be used between two VT circuit breakers or between VT and VT circuit breakers. Each circuit breaker must be furnished with a rotary operating mechanism and at least one of them with a knob. When using a mechanical interlock for parallel switching it is required to comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and in the table. L PS PS PS X TEST X TEST NSO_ NSO_4 Left switching unit Right switching unit VT -pole VT 4-pole VT -pole VT 4-pole X L X L X L X L mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm VT P VT 4P VT P VT 4P Left switching unit Right switching unit VT -pole VT 4-pole VT -pole VT 4-pole ) X L X L X L X L mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm VT P x x VT 4P x x VT P x x VT 4P x x ) Switching unit VT 4P (4-pole version) must be located on the right side. TEST TEST NSO_ / Siemens LV 6

87 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching VT9-8LC. Mechanical interlocking Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers/ switch disconnectors, so that they cannot both trip simultaneously, but only one of them at a time. Both circuit breakers may be turned off simultaneously. The VT9-8LC mechanical interlocking is intended for two VT circuit breakers. VT9-8LC interlocking is intended for one VT circuit breaker and one VT. Circuit breakers can be delivered in fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions. Order No. of mechanical VT9-8LC VT9-8LC interlocking Circuit breaker types VT VT VT VT Circuit breaker installation in switchgear and controlgear assemblies Detailed information is included in the "Instructions for use", which is available on our website: assistance NSO_6 min R = ON OFF... 7 ON OFF TEST TEST min. 8 Siemens LV 6 /

88 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Design The motorized operating mechanism is equipped with spring storage units. The energy stored in the springs makes it possible to switch the circuit breaker on in less than ms. Releasing the spring energy storage unit and tripping the circuit breaker is ensured by a closing coil. The motorized operating mechanism can trip the circuit breaker in 8 ms. This method of tripping is suitable for most technological applications. When faster circuit breaker tripping is required (e.g., because an emergency STOP button was pressed), it is possible to use the motorized mechanism in combination with an undervoltage trip unit or a shunt trip unit. The motorized operating mechanism front panel contains a selector switch for selecting the drive modes. There is also the possibility to remotely indicate the selector switch state. - The first mode is automatic remote control (selector switch in position AUTO). This is the standard position in automatic operation. - The second mode is manual control (selector switch position MANUAL). In manual mode the motorized operating mechanism does not need any voltage to perform perform opening/closing operations. Remote switching on and off in position AUTO is carried out with pushbuttons that must be connected to the motorized operating mechanism connector. Furthermore, this position makes it is possible to control the circuit breaker with the pushbuttons located on the motorized operating mechanism front panel. In MANUAL mode it is possible to switch on and off with the green and red pushbuttons located on the front panel of the motorized operating mechanism cover. The function of the remote control ON button in MANUAL mode is locked out, whereas the function of the remote control OFF button remains active for safety reasons. The motorized operating mechanism, as opposed to the circuit breaker, recognizes only two fixed positions. In the first position the circuit breaker is ON. When the circuit breaker is tripped in AUTO mode by the trip unit or shunt/undervoltage trip units, then because of mechanical link between the circuit breaker and the motor mechanism, a pulse will be generated to automatically wind up the spring of the storage unit. The motor mechanism can be wound up automatically by permanent closing switch S. In the second fixed position the circuit breaker is switched off and the loaded drive is ready to switch the breaker on after it has received the setting pulse. The motorized operating mechanism makes it possible to control the circuit breaker after the loss of control voltage. In MAN- UAL and AUTO modes, it is possible to wind up the storage unit by repeated rotation of the foldable handle. After charging the spring mechanism with spring energy, it is possible to switch the circuit breaker on and off with the control buttons located on the front panel of the motor mechanism. The front panel incorporates a storage unit status indicator to indicate what state the VT motor mechanism unit storage is in and whether it is possible to switch the circuit breaker on. The VT motor mechanism is also able to remotely indicate the storage status. A corresponding signal is issued to the terminal strip. VT motor mechanism have optional designs, alternatively with MANUAL/AUTO indication. The mechanism can be furnished with an electromechanical operations counter that may be installed in the drive cover or outside of the circuit breaker (e.g. in the switchgear door). A metal holder included in the scope of supply of the external operations counter. Connecting is facilitated with connectors. The motorized operating mechanism can be locked in off position using as many as three padlocks with shank diameter max. 4. mm. A VT9 -MF cover can be attached to the ON-OFF switch of the motorized operating mechanism, and then sealed with sealing wire. The cover prevents turning on the circuit breaker from the drive panel. Extension cable VT9 -MF has a connector on one side that connects to the connector located on the motor mechanism and conductors on the other side that connect, for example, to a terminal block. Order No. VT9 -M.. Operational voltage U e V AC 4, 48,,, 4, DC 4, 48,, Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Control pulse length for storing ms 4... ) Control pulse length ms... 7 ), 4... ) Time before switching on ms < Time before switching off ms 8 Frequency of cycles ON/OFF contact making/min Frequency of cycles - contact making instant successive ON/OFF cycles Mechanical endurance contact making Input power AC VA DC W Protection AC 4, 48, V; AC V LSN 4C/; LSN C/ DC 4, 48, V; DC V LSN-DC 4C/; LSN-DC C/ Rated operating current V AC A/ AUTO/MANUAL switches I e /U e DC.A/ Order No. VT9 -MF Number of conductors Conductor cross sections S mm. Conductor lengths cm 6 ) For sequence of control pulses, see /6. / Siemens LV 6

89 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Function Circuit breaker switched on/off by the motorized operating mechanism Circuit breaker switched on by the motorized operating mechanism electrically by pushbutton ON Circuit breaker switched off by the motorized operating mechanism electrically by pushbutton OFF 4 6 Main contacts Auxiliary switch NSO_8 4 6 Main contacts Auxiliary switch 8 NSO_ Auxiliary switch Relative switch accessory compartment.4... Auxiliary switch Relative switch 8 8 accessory compartment.4... Relative switch Early switch accessory compartment.4... Relative switch Early switch accessory compartment.y.y4.y.y4.y.y.y.y Early switch t [ms] accessory compartment.y.y4.y.y4.y.y.y.y Early switch 9 9 t [ms] accessory compartment Wiring diagram Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breaker Recommended wiring of the control circuits Q Circuit breaker state Switched on Toggle positions of circuit breaker L+ ON Switched off by trip units, or by TEST button or by the trip pushbutton on the motorized operating mechanism OF F B S Switched off manually or electrically by the operating mechanism Motor drive Wiring diagram description 9 7 X 4 Symbol MP Description VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism M Motor P storage mechanism X Connector to connect control circuits NC NO S C M P X4 S YC B Connector for external operations counter Switch indicating AUTO/MANUAL modes external VT9-MF operations counter recommended wiring of the control circuits (not included in operating mechanism order) ON make pushbutton MP OFF break pushbutton X 8 6 X4 S Switch for energy storage (switched on = automatic storage, may be continuously switched on) Q Motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker PE N- Ext. oper. counter Siemens LV 6 /

90 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Siemens AG Tripping of the circuit breaker with motorized operating mechanism by the trip unit (switch S automatic spring charging) Main contacts Auxiliary switch Auxiliary switch Relative switch Relative switch Early switch Early switch t [ms] accessory compartment accessory compartment accessory compartment Tripping of the circuit breaker with motorized operating mechanism by a shunt trip unit or undercurrent trip unit (switch S automatic spring charging) Main contacts Auxiliary switch Auxiliary switch Relative switch Relative switch t [ms] accessory compartment accessory compartment NSO_4 NSO_4 Wiring diagram Circuit breaker switched on by the motorized operating mechanism (electrical ON signal) and switched off by the shunt trip unit Recommended wiring of the control circuits L+ Q OFF B Motor drive X 9 7 NC MP X C NO S 8 PE N- 6 ON 4 S A X4 J acc. c. no. YC N- A Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism (electrical ON signal) and switched off by the undervoltage trip unit Recommended wiring of the control circuits L+ Q B OFF Motor drive X 9 7 NC NO S C ON VT9 -O. B or M P U< U 4 Ext. oper. counter S A VT9 -U. B B VT9 -S. VT9 -S. or M P U< U NSO_4 MP X 8 PE N- 6 X4 YC Ext.oper. counter A J N- B NSO_44 acc. c. no. /4 Siemens LV 6

91 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Recommended actuating pulses Circuit breaker switched on/off by motorized operating mechanism switch S permanently closed (automatic spring charging) or open HK PS 8 8 > 4 4 IMP OFF > 6 > 7 IMP ON t [ms] Circuit breaker switched off by trip unit or shunt/undervoltage trip units and switched on by the motorized operating mechanism switch S permanently closed (automatic spring charging) HK NSO_4 Description of charts Symbol HK PS RS R OFF IMP S IMP ON IMP OFF X Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breakers Circuit breaker state Switched on Description main contacts auxiliary switch relative switch circuit breaker closes instantly, by trip unit pulse to charge spring mechanism make pulse for motorized operating mechanism break pulse for motorized operating mechanism random segment of time Switched off by trip units, or by TEST button or by the trip pushbutton on the motorized operating mechanism Switched off manually or electrically by the operating mechanism Toggle positions of circuit breakers RS R OFF > 4 > 88 7 IMP ON t [ms] NSO_46 Circuit breaker switched off by the rip unit or shunt/undervoltage trip units and switched on by the motorized operating mechanism S switch closed only for storing HK RS X + > 88 X > 4 4 IMP S R OFF > 7 IMP ON t [ms] NSO_47 Siemens LV 6 /

92 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Siemens AG Use of VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism in the automatic standby system Wiring diagram of the motorized operating mechanism of the circuit breaker Recommended control pulses for switching of the VT circuit breakers by the motorized operating mechanism after their switching off by a shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit in the automatic standby system Control circuit Q L+ ON S B OFF Motor drive X NC NO S C A VT9 -U. B VT9 -S. or M P U< U HK RS SV SP > 4 > 88 7 IMP ON t [ms] NSO_8 MP X Symbol M P X X4 S YC B ON OFF S Q 8 PE 6 X4 YC Cycle counter J A N- Description Motor Energy storage device Connector for connection of control circuits Connector for external cycle counter Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) mode External VT9 -MF cycle counter Recommended connection of control circuits (is not included in the motorized operating mechanism supply) Pushbutton Pushbutton Switch for storage (closed = automatic storage; it can be closed permanently) Motorized operating mechanism circuit breakersee page / In a standby system, if a Bowden cable is used for mechanical interlocking, then an auxiliary trip unit should be used to switch the circuit breaker off. Otherwise, the first attempt of switching a standby circuit breaker may fail. B cav. no. NSO_78 HK RS SV SP Symbol HK RS SV SP IMP ON IMP OFF 4 IMP S X > 4 X + > 88 > > 7 IMP ON t [ms] Description Main contacts Relative switch Pulse for shunt trip unit Pulse for undervoltage trip unit Motorized operating mechanism make pulse Motorized operating mechanism storage pulse (generated by S switch) Switched on Switched off by trip units, TEST or REVISION pushbutton NSO_8 Switched off manually or by motorized operating mechanism electrically (wound up state) /6 Siemens LV 6

93 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories for plug-in version Overview Plug-in bases Position signalling VT9-4WL position signalling switch VT9-4PA base Locking plug-in base against inserting the circuit breaker/disconnector The plug-in version of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid exchange of the circuit breaker is needed. The plug-in base includes complete accessories for assembling a circuit breaker/switch disconnector in plug-in design from the original fixed-mounted version The components of the plug-in base are: - supporting part of the plug-in base - connection sets (total of 6 terminals) for fitting on to the switching unit - interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching off of the circuit breaker for handling inserting and removal) - set of mounting bolts for securing circuit breaker into plug-in base (to secure plug-in base into switchboard, a set of mounting bolts is used that is included in the scope of supply of the VT 7-.AA6-AA switching unit. Main circuit The VT9-4TA connecting set is used for connecting with busbars or cable lugs and is included in the scope of supply of the VT9 7-.AA6-AA switching unit For connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connecting sets (see page /9) The type of connections must comply with our recommendations (see page /). Auxiliary circuits These are connected using a VT9-4PL -wire cable. Coding VT9-4WN coding set The plug-in base may be provided with a maximum of four switches (for 4-pole version, max. 6 switches) for signalling the connected/removed position. States of VT9-4WL switches in the plug-in base according to the circuit breaker position Accessory compartment... 4 (9, ) ) Circuit breaker position 4 Connected Removed = contact open, = contact closed ) Accessory compartments 9 and are for 4-pole version only. Technical specifications Order No. VT9-4WL Rated operational voltage U e V AC 4 AC Rated isolation voltage U i V AC Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Rated operational current I e /U e AC- A/4V DC-. A/ V, A/ V, 4 A/ V Thermal current I th A 6 Arrangement of contacts Connector cross-section S mm.... Terminal protection IP (connected switch) A wiring diagram showing the circuit breaker situated in a plugin mounting base and outfitted with accessories, is shown on page /. Plug-in base with motorized operating mechanism The plug-in base and the circuit breaker can be provided with a coding set, which prevents inserting any other circuit breaker into the plug-in base. Circuit breaker, plug-in version, with motorized operating mechanism Siemens LV 6 /7

94 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories for plug-in version Recommended wiring of the circuit breaker in plug-in design with motorized operating mechanism Symbol MP Description VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism L+ Motor drive control circuits Q M P X X4 Motor energy storage device terminal strip to connect control circuits terminal strip for external operations counter B OFF Motor drive ON S S YC B ON Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) modes VT9 -MF external operations counter recommended wiring of the control circuits (control circuits not included in motorized operating mechanism delivery) make pushbutton OFF break pushbutton S Switch to store energy X 9 7 NC NO S C M 4 P Q Motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker for AC 4 V LSN 4C/ AC 48 V LSN 4C/ AC V LSN 4C/ AC V LSN C/ DC 4 V LSN-DC 4C/ DC 48 V LSN-DC 4C/ DC V LSN-DC 4C/ DC V LSN-DC C/ MP X 8 PE 6 N X4 YC Operating counter NSO_8 Unplugging the circuit breaker with motorized operating mechanism Each time before removing the circuit breaker, we recommend first to turn the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the motorized operating mechanism to the MANUAL position More operating information is available in the operating instructions Not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recommended wiring, could mean that the circuit breaker will not successfully switch on at the first attempt. /8 Siemens LV 6

95 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories for plug-in version Changes in states of switches when inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker State of switches before removing inserted position State of switches after removing withdrawn position Accessory compartment Accessory compartment (4,,6) ) (4,,6) ) Knob position of circuit breaker State of the main contacts VT9 -AC 4 VT9 -AD VT9 -AC Switched on 4 VT9 -AD VT9 -AC 4 VT9 -AD VT9 -AC 4 VT9 -AD VT9 -AC 4 VT9 -AD 4 VT 9-AC 4 VT9 -AD Manually switched off or switched off by motorized operating mechanism Switched off by trip units Switched off from switched-on state: by means of auxiliary trip unit, TEST pushbutton or by OFF pushbutton located on the motorized operating mechanism = contact open, = contact closed ) Accessory compartments 4,, 6 are for 4-pole version only. Siemens LV 6 /9

96 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories for withdrawable version Design Withdrawable version mounting base Position signalling VT9-4WL position signalling switch Circuit breaker installed VT9-4WA in withdrawable version base withdrawable version base The withdrawable version of the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid exchange of the circuit breaker and frequent checking of the circuit are needed. The withdrawable version base includes all parts needed to convert a circuit breaker or switch disconnector from fixedmounted version to withdrawable version. The components of the withdrawable version are: - supporting part of the withdrawable version - movable side plates - connection sets (total of 6 terminals) for fitting onto the switching unit - interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching off of the circuit breaker for handling, inserting and withdrawing) - a set of mounting bolts is used to fasten the withdrawable version mounting base into the switchboard Main circuit The VT9-4TA connecting set is used for connecting with busbars or cable lugs and is included in the scope of supply of the VT 7-.AA6-AA switching unit For connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connecting sets (see page /9) The type of connections must comply with our recommendations (see page /). Auxiliary circuits These are connected using the VT9-4PL -wire cable. Coding VT9-4WN coding set The withdrawable version can be provided with switches for signalling the position of the circuit breaker, see table. Technical specifications Order No. VT9-4WL Rated operational voltage U e V AC 4, AC Rated isolation voltage U i V AC Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Rated operational current I e /U e AC- A/4 V DC-. A/ V, A/ V, 4 A/ V Thermal current I th A 6 Arrangement of contacts Connector cross-section S mm.... Terminal protection IP (connected switch) For wiring diagram of the circuit breaker in plug-in base with accessories, see page /. States of VT9-4WL switches in withdrawable device according to circuit breaker and lockout positions Accessory compartment,,,4,7 6,8 (9, ) ) (9, ) ) Circuit breaker and lockout position 4 4 Connected and unlocked Withdrawn and unlocked Removed and unlocked = contact open; = contact closed ) Accessory compartments 9 and are for 4-pole version only. Operating state is always in locked-out position In locked-out position, it is possible to lock the withdrawable device, so that the circuit breaker cannot be switched on (for more detailed information, see Advantages and enhanced safety for operator ) 4 The withdrawable version mounting base and the circuit breaker can be provided with a coding set, which prevents inserting another circuit breaker into the withdrawable version mounting base. /4 Siemens LV 6

97 Locking Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories for withdrawable version Description Locking the circuit breaker in withdrawable version base against tampering Locking the withdrawable version base against inserting the circuit breaker Withdrawable version with motorized operating mechanism Recommended wiring of the circuit breaker in withdrawable version with motorized operating mechanism L+ B Motor drive control circuits Q OFF Motor drive ON S Symbol MP M P X X4 S YC B ON OFF S Q Description VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism Motor energy storage device terminal strip to connect control circuits terminal strip for external operations counter Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) modes VT9 -MF external operations counter recommended wiring of the control circuits (control circuits not included in motorized operating mechanism delivery) make pushbutton break pushbutton Switch to charge spring mechanism Motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker for AC 4 V LSN 4C/ AC 48 V LSN 4C/ AC V LSN 4C/ AC V LSN C/ DC 4 V LSN-DC 4C/ DC 48 V LSN-DC 4C/ DC V LSN-DC 4C/ DC V LSN-DC C/ Inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker with motorized operating mechanism Each time before inserting or withdrawing the circuit breaker, we recommend placing the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the motorized operating mechanism to MANUAL position More operating information is available in the operating instructions Not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recommended wiring, could mean that the circuit breaker will not successfully switch on at the first attempt. X NC NO S C M P MP X 8 6 X4 NSO_8 PE N YC Operating counter Siemens LV 6 /4

98 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories for withdrawable version Switches in the accessory compartments of the switching unit Changes in states of the switches when inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker Siemens AG Circuit breaker before insertion Circuit breaker before withdrawal Accessory compartment Knob position of circuit breaker State of the main contacts State before inserted/withdrawn position State after inserted/withdrawn position State of switches before insertion State of switches after insertion - withdrawn position - connected position State of switches before withdrawal State of switches after withdrawal - connected position - withdrawn position (4,,6) ) (4,,6) ) VT9-AC 4 VT9-AD VT9-AC 4 VT9-AD Switched on VT9-AC 4 VT9-AD VT9-AC 4 VT9-AD VT9-AC 4 VT9-AD VT9-AC 4 VT9-AD Manually switched off or by motorized operating mechanism Switched off by trip units Switched off from switched-on state: by means of auxiliary trip unit, TEST pushbutton or by OFF pushbutton on the motorized operating mechanism = contact open, = contact closed ) Accessory compartments 4,, 6 are for 4-pole version only. /4 Siemens LV 6

99 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Insulating barriers and terminal covers Overview Use of insulating barriers and terminal covers with circuit breakers and switch disconnectors Fixed-mounted version Front connection Terminals,, -If U e = AC 4 V, it is necessary to use VT9-8CE insulating barriers or VT9-8CB terminal covers. - If insulated conductors are not used for connecting the main circuit to terminals,,, flexibars or rear connection, it is necessary to use VT9-8CE insulating barriers or a VT9-8CB terminal cover. Terminals, 4, 6 - If the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is connected to the source with terminals, 4, 6 and if U e = AC 4 V, it is necessary to use VT9-8CE insulating barriers or a VT9-8CB terminal cover. - If insulated conductors are not used for connecting the main circuit to terminals, 4, 6, and flexibars or rear connections are not used, then it is necessary to use VT9-8CE insulating barriers or VT9-8CB terminal covers. Rear connection Neither insulating barriers nor terminal covers have to be used. Plug-in and withdrawable versions Neither insulating barriers nor terminal covers have to be used. D B = C = 8 VT9-8CB A A A B = C = ON ON ON OFF NSO_ OFF OFF TEST TEST TEST B = B = A Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switchdisconnector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for connections using insulated conductors, cables, flexibars or with rear connection) A Minimum insulation length of bare conductors (using VT9-8CE insulating barriers from mm to max. mm, or by adding additional insulation for the conductors with barriers to obtain at least A value) A Minimum distance: between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated conductors and busbars) between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and busbar between two circuit breaker/switch disconnectors situated vertically above one another between uninsulated connections of two circuit breakers/switch disconnectors above one another B, C Minimum distance between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall D Minimum distance between uninsulated conductors Siemens LV 6 /4

100 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Insulating barriers and terminal covers D Siemens AG Busbar > mm max. mm Cable max. mm Flexibar NSO_6 AC U e V 4 V V 69 V ) VT H wired with I k ka >6...6 ka 6 ka ka ka VT N wired with I k 6 ka 6 ka 6 ka ka C < 8 mm A (mm) D mm A (mm) ) I k = max. short-circuit current in the protected circuit (rms). A (mm) A (mm) D mm A (mm) A (mm) C 8 mm A (mm) D mm A (mm) A (mm) /44 Siemens LV 6

101 Dimensional drawings - -pole, fixed-mounted version Fixed-mounted version, front connection Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings > AC 4 V... < AC 4 V Drilling pattern 48 ON OFF x Ø. 6 TEST R 88. NSO_. 6 6 Ø 8. 7 Fixed-mounted version, front connection (VT9 4-4TD connecting set) 4 ON OFF TEST NSO_7 Ø Siemens LV 6 /4

102 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Siemens AG Fixed-mounted version, front connection (VT9-4TF connecting set) 4 4 ON OFF TEST NSO_9 Ø 8 Ø 8 Fixed-mounted version, front connection (VT9-4TF connecting set) ON OFF TEST NSO_ 6 x Ø 8.4 /46 Siemens LV 6

103 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Fixed-mounted version, rear connection (VT9-4RC connecting set) Drilling pattern 48 TEST ON OFF Ø 8. NSO_ 4 x Ø. R Fixed-mounted version, front connection (VT9-4ED connecting set) ON 7 9 OFF 6 TEST 6. NSO_ Ø. Siemens LV 6 /47

104 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Fixed-mounted version, front connection (VT9-4EE connecting set) Siemens AG 9 4 ON OFF TEST Ø 8. NSO_ 7 7 Fixed-mounted version, with rotary operating mechanism 4. NSO_8 VT VT9 -HA.,-HB. VT9 -HE.,-HF. TEST /48 Siemens LV 6

105 Siemens AG Fixed-mounted version, rotary operating mechanism with adjustable knob VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings 7 7 NSO_6 TEST 7 4 VT VT9 -HA.,-HB. VT9 -HE.,-HF. 4 VT9 -HG.,-HH. VT9 -HJ. 6 Outside surface of cabinet door (-HJ) 7 4 (-HJ) 6 Cabinet door cut-out min x Ø 6. Fixed-mounted version, VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism Ø Opening dimensions in switchgear door for external operation cycle NSO_8 Hinge of cabinet door R R max TEST NSO_9 8 4 MANUAL AUTO 7 Ø 4, max Siemens LV 6 /49

106 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Siemens AG Dimensional drawings - -pole, plug-in version Plug-in base VT9-4PA Drilling patterns L Ø 4+8 mm 4 6 R x Ø. 7 4 NSO_ 4 x Ø Ø 8. / Siemens LV 6

107 Plug-in base, VT9-8CB terminal cover Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings 4 4 L R Ø 4+6 mm 4 6 NSO_6 7 Plug-in version ON OFF 9 TEST NSO_ Siemens LV 6 /

108 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Siemens AG Plug-in version Drilling patterns ON TEST OFF Ø 8. 4 x Ø NSO_9 4 x Ø. R Plug-in version, rotary operating mechanism TEST NSO_4 7 / Siemens LV 6

109 Plug-in version, VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings MANUAL AUTO Ø 4, max. TEST NSO_4 8 Siemens LV 6 /

110 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Siemens AG Dimensional drawings - -pole, withdrawable version Withdrawable version VT9-4WA Drilling patterns x Ø. 4 4 x Ø. L Ø 4+8 mm Ø 8. R NSO_48 7. Withdrawable version, VT9-8CB terminal cover 8 L R 4 4 Ø 4+8 mm NSO_ /4 Siemens LV 6

111 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Withdrawable version Operating position Maintenance position 79 ON OFF TEST NSO_ Withdrawable version, rotary operating mechanism Operating position Maintenance position NSO_ TEST 7 Siemens LV 6 /

112 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Siemens AG Withdrawable version, VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism MANUAL AUTO Ø 4, max. TEST 8 NSO_9 Withdrawable device, rear connection (VT9-4RC connecting sets) Drilling pattern ON TEST OFF Ø 8. NSO_66 4 x Ø /6 Siemens LV 6

113 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Withdrawable device, rear connection (VT9-4RC connecting sets) Drilling pattern > AC 4 V... < AC 4 V 48 TEST ON OFF R 88 4 x Ø.. NSO_ Ø Siemens LV 6 /7

114 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Siemens AG Dimensional drawings - 4-pole, fixed-mounted version Fixed-mounted version, front connection (connecting set VT9 4-4TD + VT9 4-4TD) N ON OFF TEST N Fixed-mounted version, front connection (connecting set VT9-4TF + VT9-4TF) 4 4 ON OFF TEST 4 NSO_74 Ø 8 Ø 8 /8 Siemens LV 6

115 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Fixed-mounted version, front connection (connecting set VT9 4-4TF + VT9 4-4TF) 4 8 Siemens AG Dimensional drawings ON OFF TEST 4 Ø Ø Fixed-mounted version, front connection (connecting set VT9-4TF + VT9-4TF) ON OFF TEST 4 NSO_78 6 x Ø 8.4 Siemens LV 6 /9

116 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Siemens AG Fixed-mounted version, front connection (connecting set VT9-4TF + VT9-4TF) ON OFF TEST 6 6 Ø 8. NSO_8 4 x Ø. R Fixed-mounted version, with rotary operating mechanism 77. N NSO_8 VT VT9 -HA.,-HB. VT9 -HE.,-HF. TEST 7 N Fixed-mounted version, rotary operating mechanism with adjustable knob N 7 7 NSO_8 7 4 VT VT9 -HA.,-HB. VT9 -HE.,-HF. 4 VT9 -HG.,-HH. VT9 -HJ. TEST 6 Outside surface of cabinet door N (-HJ) 7 4 (-HJ) 6 /6 Siemens LV 6

117 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Cabinet door cut-out min x Ø 6. NSO_8 Hinge of cabinet door Ø Fixed-mounted version, VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism Opening dimensions in switchgear door for external operation cycle R R max 9 TEST NSO_ MANUAL AUTO 7 Ø 4, max Siemens LV 6 /6

118 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Siemens AG Dimensional drawings - 4-pole, plug-in version Plug-in base VT9-4PA4 Drilling patterns 4 8 N 4 L R Ø 4+8 mm 4 x Ø. N NSO_89. 4 x Ø. 6 6 Ø 8. 4 Plug-in base, VT9-8CB4 terminal cover N L R 4 Ø 4+8 mm N NSO_9 7 /6 Siemens LV 6

119 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Plug-in version ON OFF 9 TEST NSO_ Plug-in version, rear connection (connecting set VT9-4RC + VT9-4RC) Drilling pattern ON 4 TEST OFF Ø 8. 6 NSO_9 4 x Ø Siemens LV 6 /6

120 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Plug-in version, rotary operating mechanism Siemens AG 9 TEST 4 NSO_96 7 Plug-in version, VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism MANUAL AUTO 9 Ø 4, max. TEST 4 NSO_98 8 /64 Siemens LV 6

121 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Dimensional drawings - 4-pole, withdrawable version Withdrawable version, VT9-4WA4 Drilling pattern N 4 4 x Ø. 4 x Ø. L Ø 4+8 mm N Ø 8. 4 R NSO_ Withdrawable version, VT9-8CB4 terminal cover L N R 4 4 Ø 4+8 mm N 4 6 NSO_ Siemens LV 6 /6

122 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Withdrawable version Siemens AG Operating position Maintenance position ON OFF TEST NSO_ Withdrawable version, rear connection (connecting set VT9-4RC + VT9-4RC) TEST ON OFF Ø 8. 6 NSO_ x Ø. /66 Siemens LV 6

123 Withdrawable version, rotary operating mechanism Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Operating position Maintenance position TEST 4 7 NSO_6 Withdrawable version, VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism MANUAL AUTO NSO_ Ø 4, max. TEST 4 8 Siemens LV 6 /67

124 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Notes Notes Siemens AG /68 Siemens LV 6

125 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog Technical Information VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A / General data / Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors / Accessories and Components / Auxiliary switches Auxiliary trip units /6 Manual/motorized operating mechanism /8 Mounting accessories /9 Connecting accessories / Further accessories VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A / Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors / Accessories and Components /6 Trip units / Auxiliary switches /7 Auxiliary trip units /9 Rotary operating mechanisms / Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching / Motorized operating mechanism /8 Mounting accessories for plug-in version /4 Mounting accessories for withdrawable version /44 Insulating barriers and terminal covers /46 Project Planning Assistance /46 Dimensional drawings Siemens LV 6

126 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog General data Overview Connecting sets 4 6 Switching unit Accessories for plug-in and withdrawable devices Accessories NSO_a Molded case circuit breaker Plug-in device Withdrawable device Box terminals Circular conductor terminal Multiple feed-in terminal Multiple feed-in terminal Rear connection Front connection Auxiliary conductor terminal Rotary operating mechanism Lateral rotary operating mechanism Mechanical parallel switching Mechanical interlocking Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire Motor operating mechanism Shunt trip unit Undervoltage trip unit Connecting cable Position signalling Keying pins Auxiliary switch NC/NO Auxiliary switch NC/NO Auxiliary switch, change-over contact Auxiliary switch, early Lockingtype lever Sealing inset Additional cover for overcurrent releases Terminal cover Insulating barriers / Siemens LV 6

127 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Overview Switching unit The switching unit includes: Two VT9-4TA connecting sets for connecting busbars or cable lugs VT9-8CE insulating barriers A set of 4 installation bolts (M x ) The switching unit must be fitted with a trip unit (circuit breaker) or a VT9 6-6DT switch disconnector unit (switch disconnector) For maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads in accordance with the ambient temperature, see page /. For recommended cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexibars for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions, see page /. Circuit breaker The circuit breakers consist of a - or 4-pole switching unit and a trip unit which is available with a choice of different characteristics. Switch disconnector The switch disconnector consists of a switching unit and a switch disconnector unit. Selection and ordering data Switching units Rated current I n Breaking capacity I cu DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. A ka kg -pole version 6 6 B VT 76-AA6-AA unit B VT 76-AA6-AA unit pole version, unprotected N 6 6 B VT 76-AA46-AA unit B VT 76-AA46-AA unit pole version, protected N 6 6 B VT 76-AA6-AA unit B VT 76-AA6-AA unit 7.4 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /

128 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Siemens AG Selection and ordering data for accessories ETU trip units Rated current I n Current setting of the inverse- time delayed overload trip units L I r DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kw A kg Line protection, ETU LP, LI function ) for protecting lines with low starting currents without I r regulation B VT9-6AB unit.4 B VT9-6AB unit B VT9 4-6AB unit.4 B VT9-6AB unit B VT9 6-6AB unit.4 Distribution protection, ETU DP, LI function ) for protecting lines and transformers... B VT9-6AC unit B VT9 4-6AC unit B VT9 6-6AC unit. Distribution protection with N-pole protection, ETU DPN, LIN function ) for protecting lines and transformers in TN-C-S and TN-S networks... B VT9-6BC unit B VT9 4-6BC unit B VT9 6-6BC unit. Motor/generator protection, ETU MP, LI function ) for direct protection of motors and generators suitable also for protecting lines and transformers... B VT9-6AP unit B VT9 4-6AP unit B VT9 6-6AP unit. Motor/generator protection, ETU MPS, LSI function ) for direct protection of motors and generators. suitable also for protecting lines and transformers enables setting time delay of time-independent trip unit to,, or ms... B VT9-6AS unit B VT9 4-6AS unit B VT9 6-6AS unit. Switch disconnector unit 6 Switch disconnector unit ) B VT9 6-6DT unit. ) Use only with switching unit VT76-.AA6-AA or VT76-.AA46-AA. ) Use only with switching unit VT76-.AA6-AA /4 Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

129 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Auxiliary switches Auxiliary trip units Overview The circuit breakers can be equipped with auxiliary switches, alarm switches, shunt trip units, undervoltage trip units. Shunt trip units can trip the circuit breaker from a remote location. A control supply voltage is required. An undervoltage trip unit trips the circuit breaker automatically when the circuit voltage drops below 7 % U e. The undervoltage trip unit protects motors and other equipment in case of undervoltage. A control supply voltage is required. Selection and ordering data Rated control supply voltage U s DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. AC /6 Hz, DC kg Auxiliary switches and alarm switches Single NO contacts AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AC unit. AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AC unit. Single NC contacts AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AD unit. AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AD unit. Double contacts ( x NO) AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AE unit.6 AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AE unit.6 Double contacts (NO and NC) AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AF unit. AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AF unit. Double contacts ( x NC) AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AG unit.4 AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AG unit.4 Changeover contacts AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AH unit. AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AH unit. Leading contacts AC/DC 6... V B VT9 -AJ unit.4 Shunt trip units AC/DC 4, 4, 48 V B VT9 -SC unit.4 AC/DC V B VT9 -SD unit.4 AC, 4, V/DC V B VT9 -SE unit.4 Undervoltage trip units AC/DC 4, 4, 48 V B VT9 -UC unit. AC/DC V B VT9 -UD unit. AC, 4, V/DC V B VT9 -UE unit. with leading contact ) AC/DC 4, 4, 48 V B VT9 -UC unit. AC/DC V B VT9 -UD unit. AC, 4, V/DC V B VT9 -UE unit. ) Not to be used with VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism. * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /

130 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Manual/motorized operating mechanisms Siemens AG Overview Rotary operating mechanisms The rotary operating mechanism must be combined from: For rotary operation of the circuit breaker: - VT9 -HA. or VT9 -HB. for frontside operation - VT9 -HE or VT9 -HE black knob or - VT9 -HF red knob For operation through the switchgear cabinet door: - VT9 -HA. or VT9 -HB. for frontside operation - VT9 -HJ.. extension shaft - VT9 -HG/HH.. coupling driver - VT9 -HE/HF.. knob. For operation through side wall of cabinet: - VT9 -HC for right side operation OR - VT9 -HD for left side operation - VT9 -HJ..extension shaft Selection and ordering data - VT9 -HG/HH.. coupling driver for door-coupling operating mechanism - VT9 -HE/HF.. knob Mechanical interlocks and interlock for parallel switching Mechanical interlocks for fixed-mounted version must be combined from the following parts: - x VT9 -HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism - x VT9 -HE/HF.. knob Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire is intended for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions Mechanical interlocks must be combined from the following parts: - x VT9 -HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism - x VT9 -HE/HF.. knob Version Color DT Order No. PS* Weight kg Rotary operating mechanisms not lockable gray B VT9 -HA unit.4 lockable with padlock gray B VT9 -HA unit.4 lockable with padlock yellow label B VT9 -HB unit.4 for lateral operation, mounted on the right side, not lockable grey N B VT9 -HC unit. for lateral operation, mounted on the left side, not lockable grey N B VT9 -HD unit. Knobs for rotary operating mechanism not lockable black B VT9 -HE unit.7 lockable with padlock black B VT9 -HE unit.7 lockable with padlock red B VT9 -HF unit.7 Coupling driver for door-coupling operating mechanism To be used with the VT9 -HE or VT9 -HE black knob degree of protection IP4 black B VT9 -HG unit.4 degree of protection IP66 black B VT9 -HG unit.4 Is used in combination with the VT9 -HF red knob degree of protection IP4 yellow B VT9 -HH unit.4 degree of protection IP66 yellow B VT9 -HH unit.4 Extension shaft length 6 mm, may be shortened B VT9 -HJ unit. Extension shaft, telescopic, length mm B VT9 -HJ unit. /6 Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

131 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Manual/motorized operating mechanisms Version DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg Mechanical interlocks The mechanical interlocks additionally require the following parts: x VT9 -HA../HB.. rotary operating mechanisms, x VT9 -HE../HF.. knobs Mechanical interlocks for fixed-mounted version only B VT9-8LA unit.6 Mechanical interlock for parallel switching for fixed-mounted version only B VT9-8LB unit.6 Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wirer for two VT circuit breakers B VT9-8LC unit.9 for one VT and one VT circuit breaker B VT9-8LC unit.9 Motorized operating mechanisms with storage spring Rated control supply voltage U s Motorized operating mechanism AC/DC 4 V B VT9 -MJ unit.69 AC/DC 48 V B VT9 -ML unit.7 AC/DC V B VT9 -MN unit.7 AC V/DC V B VT9 -MQ unit.746 Motorized operating mechanism with operations counter AC/DC 4 V B VT9 -MJ unit.7 AC/DC 48 V B VT9 -ML unit.7 AC/DC V B VT9 -MN unit.78 AC V/DC V B VT9 -MQ unit.74 Accessories for motorized operating mechanisms Operations counter with cable, length cm B VT9 -MF unit. Extension cable for motorized operating mechanism, wires, length 6 cm B VT9 -MF unit.6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /7

132 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories Siemens AG Overview Plug-in version The plug-in base includes: - complete accessories for assembling circuit breakers/ switch disconnectors in plug-in design - a set of four installation bolts (M x ) for fixing the switching unit to the plug-in base The plug-in base must be outfitted with: - -pole version: VT 76-.AA6-AA switching unit - 4-pole version: VT 76-.AA46-AA or VT 76-.AA6-AA switching unit For mounting the plug-in version on busbars or cable lugs, VT9-4TA connecting sets are available. These are included in the scope of supply of the VT 76-.AA6-AA - pole version ; VT 76-.AA46/6-AA... 4-pole version switching unit. For other types of connection, other connecting sets are available. Selection and ordering data Withdrawable version The withdrawable version base includes complete accessories for assembling circuit breakers/switch disconnectors in withdrawable version. The circuit breaker inside the withdrawable version base can be moved between an operating position and a checking position (withdrawn). The withdrawable version base must be fitted with: - -pole version: VT 76-.AA6-AA switching unit or - 4-pole version: VT 76-.AA46-AA or VT 76-.AA6-AA switching unit Plug-in bases Version Max. permissible cross-section S DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. mm kg -pole version B VT9-4PA unit.6 4-pole version B VT9-4PA4 unit,4 Withdrawable version bases -pole version B VT9-4WA unit,4 4-pole version B VT9-4WA4 unit 4, /8 Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

133 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Connecting accessories Selection and ordering data Connecting Sets Version Max. permissible cross-section S mm Connecting sets for -pole version Box terminals... 4 Cu Cables, flexibars Type of connection DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg B VT9-4TC unit.4 Terminals for circular conductors For enhancing termination point protection to degree of protection IP, use the VT9-8CB terminal cover... Cu/Al cables B VT9-4TD unit Cu/Al cables B VT9 4-4TD unit.79 x... Cu/Al cables B VT9-4TF unit.8 x... 4 Cu/Al cables B VT9 4-4TF unit.7 6 x 6... Cu/Al cables B VT9-4TF unit. Terminals for rear connection set = units Terminals for front connection set = units Cu/Al busbars cable lugs Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs, flexibars Potential terminals.....; Cu flexible conductors B VT9-4RC unit.67 B VT9-4TA unit.86 B VT9-4TN unit. Front connection bars for increased pole spacing Cu/Al busbars cable lugs, flexibars B VT9-4ED unit.49 for increased pole spacing Cu/Al busbars cable lugs, flexibars B VT9-4EE unit.68 Single terminals for - or 4-pole version Box terminal set = unit... 4 Cu Cables, flexibars Terminals for circular conductors set = unit B VT9-4TC unit.8... Cu/Al cables B VT9-4TD unit Cu/Al cables B VT9 4-4TD unit.7 x... Cu/Al cables B VT9-4TF unit. x... 4 Cu/Al cables B VT9 4-4TF unit.96 6 x 6... Cu/Al cables B VT9-4TF unit. Terminal for rear connection set = unit Cu/Al busbars cable lugs B VT9-4RC unit. * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /9

134 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Further accessories Selection and ordering data Siemens AG Version DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg Insulating barriers Included in the scope of supply of the switching unit; in case the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is fed-in from below (power supply connected to terminals, 4, 6), it is necessary in most cases to install these barriers also on the bottom side set of two pieces, for -pole version B TV9-8CE unit.77 one piece, additionally needed for 4-pole version B VT9-8CE unit. Terminal cover, degree of protection IP Increases degree of protection of the connection point to IP when using VT9 4-4TD, VT9-4TF, VT9 4-4TF or VT9-4TF block type terminals, intended for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions. -pole version B VT9-8CB unit.44 4-pole version B VT9-8CB4 unit.9 Locking device for knob B VT9 -HL unit. Enables locking the circuit breaker in switched off manually position. For locking the device, you can use up to three padlocks with a shank diameter of max. 6 mm Bolt sealing insert B VT9-8BN unit. Provides sealing for: trip unit accessory compartment cover terminal cover rotary operating mechanism operating mechanism Additional cover for trip unit B VT9-8BL unit.8 Provides protection for trip units Connecting cable B VT9-4PL unit. For connecting the circuit breaker/switch disconnector accessories in withdrawable version (can also be used for plug-in and fixed-mounted versions) Position signalling switch B VT9-4WL unit. For indicating the position of the circuit breaker in the plug-in base or withdrawable version base Coding set B VT9-4WN unit. Prevents insertion of the wrong switching unit into the plug-in base or withdrawable version base Pushbutton cover B VT9 -MF unit.4 For motorized operating mechanism / Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

135 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Design Installation and connection Main circuit Is connected using Cu or Al busbars or cables, and possibly cables with cable lugs For further connecting options, connecting sets are available (see page /9) Generally, conductors from the power supply are connected to input terminals,,, (N) and conductors from the load to terminals, 4, 6, (N). However, it is possible to reverse this connection (exchanging input and output terminals) without limiting the rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity I cu ) In case of feed-in from below, the circuit breakers/switch disconnectors must be fitted with VT9-8CE insulating barriers on the bottom side of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector We recommend painting the connecting busbars in different colors Input and output conductors/busbars must be mechanically reinforced to avoid transmitting electrodynamic force to the circuit breaker/switch disconnector during short-circuiting The power circuit must be connected in such a way that the deionizing space of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is not obstructed (see page /44). Auxiliary circuits Auxiliary switches, shunt trip units or undervoltage trip units are connected to terminals using flexible.... mm Cu conductors. The motorized operating mechanism and auxiliary circuits of the plug-in base or withdrawable version base are connected with a connector. Recommended cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexibars for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions Rated current I n Permissible cross-section S Dimensions of busbars W x H Cu AI Cu Al A mm mm mm mm x x 7 x x x x 9 x 4 x x x 8 x x x 6 x 8 x x8 x 8 x 6 x8 x4 x x 6 Maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads in accordance with the ambient temperature VT circuit breaker/switch disconnector connection to pole by x 8 mm Cu cable C C 6 C 6 C 7 C 6 A 6 A 6 A 7 A 4 A Conductor cross-sections of main terminals Order No. Maximum permitted current I max Maximum permissible conductor cross-section S Cable type Sector-shaped conductor, stranded Sector-shaped conductor, solid Round conductor, stranded Round conductor, solid Busbars and cable lugs Technical information W x H A mm mm mm mm mm See page VT9-4TA 6 x... VT9-4TD VT9-4RC 6 x... /47, /8, VT9-4RC /8, /8 VT9-4TC Cu... 4 Cu... 4 Cu... 4 Cu -- VT9-4TC VT9 4-4TD Cu/Al... 4 Cu/Al... 4 Cu/Al... 4 Cu/Al VT9 4-4TD VT9-4TD... Cu/AI 6... Cu/AI... Cu/AI 6... Cu/AI VT9-4TD VT9 4-4TF 6 x (... 4) Cu/Al x (... 4) Cu/Al x (... ) Cu/Al x (... 4) Cu/Al /46, /7 VT9 4-4TF VT9-4TF x (... ) Cu/Al x(6...) Cu/Al x (... ) Cu/Al x (6... ) Cu/Al /47, /8 VT9-4TF VT9-4TF 6 x (6... ) Cu/Al 6 x (6... ) Cu/Al 6 x (6... ) Cu/Al 6 x (6... ) Cu/Al /47, /8 VT9-4TF VT9-4ED 4 /48 VT9-4EE 6 /48 VT9-4TN / flexible conductor Siemens LV 6 /

136 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Siemens AG Technical specifications Description Circuit breakers Switch disconnector unit Order number VT 76-AA6/46/6-AA, VT9 6-6DT VT 76-AA6/46/6-AA Standards EN , IEC 947- EN , IEC 947- Approval marks Number of poles, 4 Rated current I n A,, 4,, 6 -- Rated uninterrupted current I u A 6 Rated operational current I e A -- 6 Rated operational voltage U e V AC max. 69 AC max. 69 DC max. 44 Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 8 Rated insulation voltage U i V 69 Utilization category Selectivity AC 69 V A -- Switching mode AC 69 V DC 44 V AC- B DC- B Rated short-time withstand current U e = AC 69 V I cw /t 8 ka/ ms, 7 ka/ ms, 6. ka/ s 7, ka/ s Series U e VT N VT H U e -- Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (rms value) ) I cu Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (rms value) I cs /U e 6 ka 6 ka ka ka 4 ka 8 ka ka 8 ka ka 6 ka ka ka 7 ka 6 ka ka ka AC V AC 4 V AC V AC 69 V AC V AC 4 V AC V AC 69 V Rated short-ckt making capacity (peak value) I cm /U e 7 ka 4 ka AC 4 V 4 ka/ac 4 V, 4 ka/ac 44 V Off-time at I cu ms -- Losses per pole at I n = 6 A W 7 Mechanical endurance cycles Electrical endurance (U e = AC 4 V ) cycles Switching frequency cycles/ hr Operating force N Front-side device protection IP4 Terminal protection IP Operating conditions Reference ambient temperature C 4 Ambient temperature range C Working environment dry and tropical climate Degree of pollution Max. elevation m Seismic resistance m/s g at 8... Hz Design modifications Front/rear connection Plug-in design Withdrawable design Accessories Switches-auxiliary/relative/signal/leading Shunt trip unit Undervoltage trip unit/with leading switch, with alarm switch Front rotary oper. mechanism/lateral oper. mech. right/left Mechanical interlocking to the rotary oper. mechanism, by Bowden wire Motorized oper. mechanism with operations counter Locking-type lever Bolt sealing insert/additional cover for trip unit / /+ /+ / / / / / / available, -- unavailable + in preparation ) If the circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals, 4, 6, output terminals,, ), I cu does not change. / Siemens LV 6

137 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Schematics Circuit breakers with accessories -pole version Recommended wiring of the control circuits L+ Q OFF B Motor drive ON S Auxiliary trip/leading Plug-in device/withdrawable device 4 VT9-4PA. SO VT9-4WA. Main circuit X NC NC NO 9 7 NO 4 A VT9 -U. B VT9 -S. A.Y VT9 -U..Y VT9 -U..Y VT9 -AJ VT9-6.. I> I> A S6 C S C or or or M P U< U U< V TEST Q T T T B MP X 8 6 PE N- X4 YC Ext.oper. counter A J B A.Y acc.comp. no..y.y4 4 VT9-4PA. SO SO VT9-4WA Plug-in device/withdrawable device 6 6 NSO_49 Connecting cable X Switches signal relative auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary A B....4 VT9 -AC or.4. VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or. acc.c. no VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH VT9 -AG or or or or or or or or or or or VT9 -AF..4.. VT9 -AE.. acc.c. no. acc.c. no. acc.c. no. 4 acc.c. no. acc.c. no. + NSO_ X Connecting cable Siemens LV 6 /

138 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors 4-pole version Siemens AG Recommended wiring of the control circuits L+ B Q OFF ON S Plug-in device/withdrawable device 4 VT9-4PA. SO VT9-4WA. N Motor drive Auxiliary trip/leading Main circuit X 9 7 NC NO NC NO S6 C S C MP 4 A VT9 -U. B VT9 -S. A.Y VT9 -U..Y or or or M P U< U U<.Y VT9 -AJ V TEST VT9-6.. I> I> Q T 7 T T T4 A B X 8 6 PE N- X4 YC Ext.oper. counter A J B A.Y acc.comp. no..y.y4 VT9-4PA. SO SO VT9-4WA Plug-in device/withdrawable device 6 N NSO_ Connecting cable X Switches signal relative auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary A B VT9 -AC or.4. VT9 -AD or. VT9 -AH acc.c. no. VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH.4.. VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or or or or.4.. VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH.4.. acc.c. no. acc.c. no. acc.c. no. 4 acc.c. no. or or or or VT9 -AG.4.4 or VT9 -AF..4 or VT9 -AE.. acc.c. no. + VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or or or or acc.c. no. 6 acc.c. no. 7 acc.c. no. 8 acc.c. no. 9 or NSO_ or or or X Connecting cable /4 Siemens LV 6

139 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors MP VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism M Motor P Energy storage device X Connector to connect control circuits X4 Connector for external operations counter S Switch to signal AUTO (NO-C) / MANUAL (NC-C) modes S6 Switch to signal full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C) YC External operations counter, VT9 -MF B Recommended wiring of the control circuits - not included with drive ON, OFF Pushbutton S Switch for energy storage (switched on = automatic storage, switch may be continuously switched on) Q Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism J VT switching unit Q Main contacts T, T, T, T4 ) Current transformers V Trip-free mechanism VT9-6.. VT9 6-6DT circuit breaker - trip unit - ETU LP, DP, MDP switch-disconnector - switch-disconnector unit TEST Pushbutton to test trip unit VT9-4PA -pole plug-in base VT9-4WA -pole withdrawable version base X, X VT9-4PL connecting cable SO, SO, SO Contacts signalling position of circuit breaker/switch disconnector in plug-in base or withdrawable version base (Position signalling switch VT9-4WL) VT9 -U. Undervoltage trip unit VT9 -S. Shunt trip unit VT9 -U. Undervoltage trip unit with leading contact VT9 -AJ Leading contact acc. c. no. Accessory compartment number ) Only for 4-pole version of the VT 76-.AA6-AA switching unit. Functions States of auxiliary switches located in the switching unit accessory compartment Circuit breaker state Lever position of circuit breaker State of the main contacts Accessory compartment, 4, and and and, 4, (6... 9) ) (6... 9) ) VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AC VT9 -AD Switched no VT9 -AJ VT9 -U. VT9 -AG VT9 -AF VT9 -AE VT9 -AH VT9 -AH VT9 -AH Switched off manually or electrically by operating mechanism Switched off by trip unit Switched off by auxiliary trip unit or by TEST button or the trip pushbutton on the motorized operating mechanism = contact open, = contact closed ) Accessory compartment 6, 7, 8, 9 are only for 4.pole design. Siemens LV 6 /

140 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Siemens AG Overview The electronic trip unit is a separate and interchangeable unit, which has to be ordered in addition to the VT switching unit. By exchanging the trip unit, the range of the circuit breaker s rated current can be easily changed. Trip units for VT switching units are available for current values of I n =, 4 and 6 A. The ETU LP trip units feature rated currents of,, 4, and 6A. The trip units (including regulation of -6%) cover a current range from to 6 A. Tripping characteristics Several different trip units are available. Some have adjustable characteristics (in order to match the protected device and to achieve the required selectivity): ETU LP trip units t L I ETU MP trip units t NSO_4 I r L t r I i I ms ms Electronic trip units ETU LP have have more characteristics with adjustable I r, t r and I rm. ETU MPS trip units L S I I t I r NSO_ I Electronic trip units ETU LP have one type of characteristic and fixed I n and I rm settings. ETU DP trip units t NSO_ I r L I i I I Electronic trip units ETU DP have one type of characteristic with adjustable I r and I rm. NSO_4 t r I sd t sd I Electronic trip units ETU MPS have more characteristics with adjustable I r, t r, I sd and t sd. ETU LP, DP, MP and MPS trip units are intended for -pole VT 76-.AA6-AA switching units and 4-pole VT 76-.AA46-AA switching units with disconnecting of the N pole. ETU DPN trip units t I N I r L t r I I i NSO_ I ETU DPN trip units are intended for 4-pole VT 76-.AA6- AA switching units with protected N pole. They have more characteristics with adjustable I r, t r, I rm and I N. /6 Siemens LV 6

141 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Trip units ETU LP, DP, MP and MPS - description of function Proper functioning of trip units does not depend on the current waveform in the main circuit. The function of the trip unit is supported by a microprocessor, which processes a sampled signal of the main circuit and recalculates it to obtain an rms value. Therefore, the trip units are suitable for protecting circuits where the sinusoidal current is distorted by high harmonics (e.g. circuits with controlled rectifiers, power factor compensators, pulse loading, and the like). All the trip units protect a circuit against short-circuiting and overloading. Tripping characteristic of the trip units is independent of the ambient temperature. The trip unit is attached to the switching unit by two bolts. The translucent cover over the adjustment controls can be sealed (with sealing wire). Setting the tripping characteristics The tripping characteristic of the trip units is defined by standard EN For trip units ETU DP, MP, MPS and DPN, the characteristic is adjusted with latched switches located on the trip unit. A visual demonstration on setting the tripping characteristic is available in the SIMARIS design software (Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution). L is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal protection. S is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance short-circuit protection for lines. Intentional delay in tripping of these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selectivity of protective devices. For ETU MPS trip units, the delay can be set at,, or ms. I is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against ultimate short-circuit currents. For ETU MP trip units, the time delay can be set at or ms.. Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L The time-dependent trip unit ETU DP is adjusted using one I r switch. The I r switch adjusts the circuit breaker s rated current, with the characteristic shifting on the current axis. The trip unit is set to one type of characteristic. The time-dependent trip units ETU MP, MPS and DPN are adjusted with two switches, I r and t r. The first ( I r ) switch adjusts the circuit breaker s rated current. The characteristic moves along the current axis. By turning the other switch (t r ), the time is adjusted after which the circuit breaker will trip while passing through 7. I r. The tripping characteristic thus moves along the time axis. Using the t r switch, it is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics. ETU MP and MPS trip units have 4 characteristics for motor protection and 4 characteristics for protecting lines. Breaking times correspond to trip unit classes A,,,. By changing t r, it is possible to select the trip unit characteristic according to the required motor starting characteristic (light, medium, heavy or very heavy starting). ETU DPN trip units have 8 characteristics for protecting lines or transformers. It is not possible to turn the circuit breaker back on immediately after the time-dependent trip unit has been actuated and the circuit breaker has tripped. The trip unit must be allowed to cool off (it has a thermal memory). The thermal memory can be disabled by turning the switch from the normal T t position to the T position. In the T position the time-dependent trip unit remains active, and only its thermal memory is deactivated. Switching off the thermal memory should be used only in well-justified cases, and with the knowledge that there could be rising temperature in the protected device, causing repeated tripping.. Delayed time-independent trip unit S This trip unit characteristic is available only in ETU MPS trip units. It is used to set up a selective cascade of circuit breakers. It is set up using parameters I sd and t sd. I sd is an n-multiple of current I r (I sd = n I r ). I sd is a short-circuit current that, within the span of I i to I i, will trip the circuit breaker with delay t sd, where t sd is a delay set up for switching off the trip unit. The delayed timeindependent trip unit actuates the circuit breaker if the current in the circuit reaches at least the preset n-multiple and lasts at least the preset delay time t sd.. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit (short-circuit trip unit) I For trip units ETU DP, MP and MPS, the time-independent instantaneous trip unit is adjusted with the I i switch. The I i switch is used for setting up the short-circuit current that, when reached or exceeded, causes instantaneous tripping of the circuit breaker. Siemens LV 6 /7

142 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Siemens AG Tripping characteristics of ETU LP, DP, MP, MPS and DPN trip units with load The tripping characteristic from the cold state indicates the tripping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the circuit breaker. The tripping characteristic tripped from warm state indicates the tripping times during which it is assumed that, before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic trip units are independent of the ambient temperature and are plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of tripping in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a steady state, as shown in the following diagram. The steady state is a period during which the characteristic does not change. If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least minutes, the tripping times will be cut by a half. If the load is less than 7% of I r, the tripping time does not become shorter. k [-]..8 NSO_ Trip units ETU LP - Lines protection Provides protection for lines with low starting currents The VT9..-6AB trip unit is intended for the VT76-.AA6-AA and VT76-.AA46-AA switching units. The LP trip unit has a thermal memory that cannot be disabled. The rated currents of the trip units are given by their order numbers and correspond to a standardized series of currents (see specifications table). The short-circuit trip unit is fixed-set at 4 I n. One of the advantages of the LP trip unit is its simplicity, because it does not require any adjustment. Therefore, it is intended for less complicated applications. Specifications Order No. Rated current I n Instantaneous short circuit protection I rm A A VT9-6AB VT9-6AB 6 VT9 4-6AB 4 6 VT9-6AB VT9 6-6AB Decrease of tripping time with load T - When tripping from the trip unit s warm state, the tripping time of the characteristic is cut short during the standstill time t u by coefficient k. Thermal standstill time of the characteristics For all trip units, the thermal standstill time is t u min. During this time, the tripping time t sd is cut short from the cold-state characteristic by the coefficient k. The real tripping time is t s = k. t sd Example I r [%] The shortening constant can be read from the diagram. With steady current 8% of I r the real tripping time will be decreased to: t s =.74. t sd k [ ] time shortening coefficient I r [A] adjusted rated current of the trip units t sd [s] tripping time of the trip unit, derived from the characteristic t s [s] real tripping time of the trip unit, tripped from warm state t u [s] standstill period for particular characteristics Trip units are preset by the manufacturer I r = min Restart = T (t) I i = min, ms t r = TV, t (t), min I sd = ms, min I N =. I r T Tripping characteristics t [s] I r L I n = A I n = A I n = 4 A I n = A I n = 6 A I i NSO_6 x I n I In = 6 A In = A In = 4 A In = A In = A /8 Siemens LV 6

143 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Trip units ETU DP - Distribution protection Provides protection for lines and transformers The VT9..-6AC trip unit is intended for VT76-.AA6- AA and VT76-.AA46-AA switching units. Operation of the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch on the front panel from position T (t) to position T (). After disabling the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains active. The operational state 7% of I r is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green in a. s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load larger than % of I r, this LED will turn red and just before tripping will begin to blink red. Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover are two photocells for communicating with the signalling unit. The trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed for practical purposes, in order to provide optimal exploitation of transformers up to. I r. The trip units have simple adjustment of the tripping characteristic. Set-up includes only the rated current and the short-circuit tripping level at 4 I r or 8 I r. Tripping characteristics t [s] min. I n = A I n = 4 A I n = 6 A I n = A I n = 4 A L.. I n = 6 A..... I r max. 4x 4x 4x.x 4x.x 4x.x 4x.x.x.x NSO_7 Ir = 7 A.6 A ~ Ii = 7 ka xi n I r I I i I i I i I i Adjustable specifications Order No. Rated current I n A Overload Restart Instantaneous protection I r short A circuit protection I i VT9-6AC 7 T () 4xI r 8 T (t), x I r VT9 4-6AC 4 T () 4xI r 4 T (t), x I r T () 4xI r VT9 6-6AC 6 4 T (t), x I r Siemens LV 6 /9

144 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Siemens AG Trip units ETU MP - Motor protection Provides protection for motors and generators Can protect lines and transformers The VT9..-6AP trip unit is intended for VT76-.AA6- AA and VT76-.AA46-AA switching units. The operation of the MP trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The MP trip unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch located on the front panel from position T (t) to position T (). After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains active. When one or two phases fail (due to current greater than I r in the remaining phases), in the M-characteristic mode, the switch will open with a 4 s delay (so-called undercurrent trip unit). Another parameter for adjusting the trip unit consists of the rated current and short-circuit tripping level. The time delay of the short-circuit trip unit can be set to ms or ms. The operational state 7% of I r is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green in a. s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load larger than % of I r, this LED will turn red and just before tripping will begin to blink red. Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover are two photocells for communicating with the signalling unit. The trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed for practical purposes that provide for optimal exploitation of transformers up to. I r. A total of 8 characteristics can be set on the trip unit. Mode M provides 4 characteristics suitable for protecting motors and in mode TV are 4 characteristics for protecting transformers and lines. The shape of each characteristic can be changed using a selector switch. Adjustable specifications Order No. Rated Overload current protection I n I r t r (7. x I r ) Restart Instantaneous short circuit protection I i A A s ka ms (TV ) T (), (TV ) T (),6 (TV ) T (), (TV ) T (), 7 (M ) T (), 44 (M ) T (), 6 8 (M 8) T (), VT9-6AP 7 (M ) T (),7 8 (M ) T (t),7 9 8 (M 8) T (t), (M ) T (t). (M ) T (t), (TV ) T (t), (TV ) T (t), 4 (TV ) T (t),6 (TV ) T (t), 6 (TV ) T (), 7 (TV ) T (), 8 (TV ) T (),6 9 (TV ) T (),4 (M ) T (), (M ) T () 4, 8 (M 8) T (), VT9 4-6AP 4 (M ) T () 6, 4 (M ) T (t) 6, 8 (M 8) T (t), 7 (M ) T (t) 4, 9 (M ) T (t), (TV ) T (t),4 4 (TV ) T (t),6 6 (TV ) T (t) 4 (TV ) T (t), (TV ) T (),8 6 (TV ) T (),4 7 (TV ) T ( 9 (TV ) T ()) (M ) T () 4 (M ) T (), 4 8 (M 8) T () 6, VT9 6-6AP 6 6 (M ) T () 7 4 (M ) T (t) 6, 4 8 (M 8) T (t) 6, 4 (M ) T (t), 48 (M ) T (t) 4 (TV ) T (t) (TV ) T (t) 7 (TV ) T (t),4 6 (TV ) T (t),8 / Siemens LV 6

145 Tripping characteristic VT9...-6AP-ETU MP Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units t [s] min. L I r max. t r I r t r ms ms I i TV t [s] L min. I r max. t r I r t r ms ms I i NSO_8 M I n = A I n = 4 A I n = 6 A I n = A I n = 4 A.. I n = 6 A x I n I I i [ka] I i [ka] I i [ka] I n = A I n = 4 A I n = 6 A I n = A I n =4 A.. I n =6 A x I n I I i [ka] I i [ka] I i [ka] Siemens LV 6 /

146 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Siemens AG Trip units ETU MPS - Motor protection, setting timing selectivity Provides protection for motors and generators Adjustable specifications Can protect lines and transformers Enables adjusting time delay of time-independent trip units Order No. Rated Overload t r (7. x I r ) Restart Instantaneous current protection short circuit The VT9..-6AS trip unit is designed for VT76-.AA6- I n I r protection I i AA and VT76-.AA46-AA switching units. The operation A A S ka ms of the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is (TV ) T equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch on the front panel from position T (t) to position T (). (TV ) T () () After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal tipping function (TV ) T () 7 remains active. (TV ) T () 9 When one or two phases fail (due to current greater than I r in the 7 (M ) T () remaining phases), in the M-characteristic mode, the switch will 44 (M ) T () open with a 4 s delay (so-called undercurrent trip unit). 6 8 (M 8) T () 7 Another parameter for adjusting the trip unit consists of the rated VT9-6AS 7 (M ) T current and tripping level of the delayed short-circuit trip unit. () 9 The time delay (t v ) can be set on the delayed short-circuit trip 8 (M ) T (t) unit at,, or ms. The operational state 7% of I r is 9 8 (M 8) T (t) signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green in a. s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of the diode in- (M ) T (t) 7 (M ) T creases. In case of a load larger than % of I r, this LED will (t) 9 turn red and just before tripping will begin to blink red. Located (TV ) T (t) on the lower part of the trip unit cover are two photocells for communicating with the signalling unit. (TV ) T (t) 4 (TV ) T (t) 7 The trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed (TV ) T (t) 9 for practical purposes that provide for optimal exploitation of 6 (TV ) T transformers up to. I r. A total of 8 characteristics can be set () on the trip unit. Mode M provides 4 characteristics suitable for 7 (TV ) T () protecting motors, and mode TV incorporates 4 characteristics 8 (TV ) T () 7 for protecting transformers and lines. The shape of each characteristic can be changed with a selector switch. 9 (TV ) T () 9 (M ) T () (M ) T () 8 (M 8) T () 7 % VT9 4-6AS 4 (M ) T () 9 4 (M ) T (t) 8 (M 8) T (t) 7 (M ) T (t) 7 9 (M ) T (t) 9 (TV ) T (t) 4 (TV ) T (t) 6 (TV ) T (t) 7 4 (TV ) T (t) 9 (TV ) T () 6 (TV ) T () 7 (TV ) T () 7 9 (TV ) T () 9 (M ) T () (M ) T () 4 8 (M 8) T () 7 VT9 6-6AS 6 6 (M ) T () 9 4 (M ) T (t) 4 8 (M 8) T (t) 4 (M ) T (t) 7 48 (M ) T (t) 9 (TV ) T (t) (TV ) T (t) 7 (TV ) T (t) 7 6 (TV ) T (t) 9 / Siemens LV 6

147 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units VT9..-6AS Tripping characteristics t [s] I n = A I n = 4 A I n = 6 A min. L I r S t v [ms] max. x Ir x Ir NSO_9... x I n I r t r I sd t v I n 7 x Ir I sd 9 x Ir I r t r I sd t v In = 6 A In = 4 A t r [s] In = A I TV Trip units ETU DPN-distribution protection with protected N pole For protecting lines and transformers in TN-C-S and TN-S networks The VT9..-6BC trip unit is only intended for the VT 76-AA6-AA switching unit. The operation of the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch on the front panel from position T (t) to position T (). After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains active. The rated current I r, delay for switching off the trip unit at 7. I r, and the tripping level of the short-circuit trip unit can be adjusted. The operational state is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green in a. s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load larger than % of I r this LED will turn red and will begin to blink red just before tripping. Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover are two photocells for communicating with the signalling unit. The current of the fourth pole (N pole) is adjusted using the IN switch as a multiple of the I r current. Measuring of current on the fourth pole can be disabled by turning the button to the OFF position. Tripping characteristics t [s].... I N N IN =. x Ir L.7 x Ir I n = A I n = 4 A I n = 6 A x Ir min. I r max. x Ir 4 x Ir NSO_ x I n I N I r t r I n I i I i 7 x Ir I N 9 x Ir I r In = 6 A t r [S] In = 4 A t r I In = A I i Siemens LV 6 /

148 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Adjustable specifications Order No. Rated current I n Overload protection I r t r (7. x I r ) Restart Instantaneous short circuit protection I i A A S ka ms, T () ,7 6 VT9-6BC T (t) 9 OFF 4 6 7, 8 T () 9 4,7 VT9 4-6BC T (t) OFF 6 4 6, 7 T () 9 4,7 4 VT9 6-6BC T (t) 48 9 OFF 7 6 /4 Siemens LV 6

149 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Auxiliary switches Overview Order number according to contact arrangement Arrangement Order No. Number of contacts Contact types of contacts VT9 -AC () NO VT9 -AE () NO VT9 -AD () NC VT9 -AG () NC VT9 -AF () + NC + NO VT9 -AH () NC + NO Functions and names of switches according to their location in accessory compartments Accessory Switch name Switch function compartment Signalling Signal to indicate the state of the circuit breaker by the trip unit Relative Relative to indicate tripping of the circuit breaker by trip units, TEST pushbutton or by OFF pushbutton on the motorized operating mechanism, 4,, (6... 9) ) Auxiliary Auxiliary to indicate the position of the main contacts Leading Leading to make/break in advance of the main contacts ) Accessory compartments for 4-pole version only. Siemens LV 6 /

150 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Auxiliary switches Siemens AG Function State of switches located in the switching unit accessory compartment Switches early contact signal relative auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary.y.y.y VT9 -AJ.Y4 acc.c. no.. VT9 -AC or VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or. acc.c. no VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or.4. or VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or.4. or. acc.c. no. acc.c. no VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or or 4. acc.c. no VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or.4. or. acc.c. no... VT9 -AG or VT9 -AF..4.. or VT9 -AE.. acc.c. no VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or or 6. acc.c. no VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or or VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or or VT9 -AC VT9 -AD VT9 -AH or or 9. acc.c. no. 7 acc.c. no. 8 acc.c. no. 9 NSO_6 Technical specifications Order No. VT9 -A. VT9 -A. ) VT9 -AJ VT9 -AH VT9 -AH ) Rated operational voltage U e V AC 6... DC 6... AC... 6 DC... 6 AC AC 4... DC 4... AC..6 DC...6 Rated isolation voltage U i V Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Rated operational current I e /U e AC A/V AC- 6A/4V,4A/4V, -- A/AC V. A/AC V -- A/ V DC A/V A/DC 6 V DC-.4 A/4 V,. A/4 V,.4..../6 V --. A/DC V --. A/ V Thermal current I th A Arrangement of contacts,,,,,, Connector cross-section S mm.... Terminal protection IP (connected switch) ) VT9 -A. is not suitable for controlling electromagnetic loads. /6 Siemens LV 6

151 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Auxiliary trip units Overview Order number of shunt trip units according to the rated operating voltage U e AC/DC 4, 4, 48 V AC/DC V AC, 4, V/DC Order No. VT9 -SC VT9 -SD VT9 -SE Order number of undervoltage trip units according to the rated operating voltage U e AC 4,4 48 V AC/DC V AC,4,/DC V Order No. VT9 -SC VT9 -SD VT9 -SE The particular rated operating voltage of the trip unit is set up by jumpers located in the trip unit. Default setting is always the maximum value. Function Shunt trip units Circuit breaker switched off by the shunt trip unit Circuit breaker states and lever positions of the circuit breaker Main contacts Auxiliary switch Auxiliary switch Relative switch NSO_64 accessory compartment Circuit breaker state Switched on Switched off by trip units, or by TEST button or by the tripping pushbutton located on the operating mechanism Switched off manually or electrically by operating mechanism L+ Lever positions of circuit breakers.4... Relative switch t [ms] accessory compartment B U B VT9 -S. NSO_8 N- Siemens LV 6 /7

152 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Auxiliary trip units Siemens AG Undervoltage trip units Circuit breaker switched off by the undervoltage trip unit Circuit breaker states and lever positions of the circuit breaker Main contacts Auxiliary switch Auxiliary switch Relative switch Relative switch Early switch accessory compartment NSO_6 accessory compartment Circuit breaker state Switched on Switched off by trip units, or by TEST button or by the trip pushbutton on the motorized operating mechanism Switched off manually or electrically by operating mechanism Arrangement, number and type of contacts Lever positions of circuit breakers Arrangement of contacts Number of contacts Contact types NC + NC + NO NONO L+ L+.Y.Y4.Y.Y4.Y.Y.Y.Y Early switch t [ms] accessory compartment N- A A U< VT9 -U. A.Y U< A.Y N- VT9 -U. NSO_9 Technical specifications Shunt trip units Order No. Rated operating voltage U e VT9 -S. AC 4, 4, 48,,, 4, V DC 4, 4, 48,, V Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Input power at. U e AC DC <VA <W Functional description U,7 U e the circuit breaker must trip Time to switch-off ms Continuous load Yes Connector cross-section S mm.... Terminal protection IP (connected trip unit) Location in accessory compartment No. Undervoltage trip units Order No. VT9 -U. VT9 -U. ) Rated operating voltage U e AC 4, 4, 48,,, 4, V DC 4, 4, 48,, V Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Input power at. U e AC DC <VA <W <VA <W Functional description U.8 U e (circuit breaker can switch on) U. U e (the circuit breaker must trip) Time to switched-off ms Continuous load Yes Connector cross-section S mm.... ) Terminal protection IP (connected trip) Location in accessory compartment No. Earl switch -- Rated operating voltage U e V -- AC Rated frequency f n Hz -- /6 Rated operating current I e /U e V -- AC A/AC Arrangement of contacts --,, Connector cross-section S mm ) Terminal protection (connected trip unit) -- IP ) Cannot be used in combination with motorized operating mechanism VT9 -M... /8 Siemens LV 6

153 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Rotary operating mechanisms Overview Rotary operating mechanism The following components of the rotary operating mechanisms are required: To switch the switching unit: - VT9 -HE or VT9 -HE black knob - VT9 -HF red knob To switch the switching unit through the switchgear cabinet door: - VT9 -HJ..extension shaft - VT9 -HG/HH.. coupling driver for door-coupling operating mechanism - VT9 -HE/HF.. knob Design Fig. : Rotary operating mechanism with knob Fig. : Rotary operating mechanism with extension shaft, coupling driver and knob The rotary operating mechanism makes it possible to actuate the circuit breaker by turning a knob, e.g. in order to switch machines on and off. The modular concept of the operating mechanisms makes allows simple mounting on the switching unit after the accessory compartment cover is removed. The operating mechanism and its accessories must be ordered separately (see page /6). The rotary operating mechanism is fixed right on the switching unit of the circuit breaker. The rotary operating mechanism coupling driver is fixed onto the switchgear door and it provides protection IP4 or IP66. The rotary operating mechanism knob is placed on the rotary operated mechanism unit or on the rotary operating mechanism coupling driver The extension shaft is available in two versions, standard (length 6 mm - can be shortened) and telescopic (adjustable length mm). Mechanical interlocks and mechanical interlock for parallel switching Mechanical interlocks for fixed-mounted versions require the following components: - x VT9 -HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism - x VT9 -HE/HF.. knob Mechanical interlocking with Bowden wire is intended for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions Mechanical interlocking with Bowden wire requires the following components: - x VT9 -HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism - x VT9 -HE/HF.. knob The rotary operating mechanism makes it possible to actuate the circuit breaker: Operation from the front panel of the circuit breaker (Fig. ) VT9 -HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism + VT9 -HE/HF.. knob Operation through the switchgear cabinet door (Fig. ) VT9 -HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism + VT9 -HJ.. extension shaft + VT9 -HE/HF.. knob + VT9 -HG/HH.. coupling driver Operation through side wall of switchgear cabinet VT9 -HC/HD.. rotary operating mechanism + VT9 -HJ.. extension shaft + VT9 -HE/HF.. knob + VT9 -HG/HH.. coupling driver Enhanced safety for operator: The rotary operating mechanism and knob allow operators to lock the circuit breaker in position switched off manually. The unit and knob of the rotary operating mechanism can be locked by three padlocks with a shank diameter up to 6 mm Each coupling driver for door-coupling operating mechanism prevents the cabinet door from being opened when the circuit breaker is in on-state or after tripping. Types VT9-HG and VT9-HG prevent the cabinet door from being opened when the circuit breaker is in the state "switched off manually" and when the rotary operating mechanism knob is locked out. Two circuit breakers with rotary operating mechanisms can be provided with mechanical interlocking or with parallel mechanical switching (see page /). Siemens LV 6 /9

154 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Rotary operating mechanisms Features Siemens AG Order No. Description Color Permits operator to Degree of lock the circuit breaker in OFF protection mode Switchgear cabinet door is locked when circuit breaker is switched on switched off manually and locked Length in mm VT9 -HA Rotary operating mechanism grey no VT9 -HA Rotary operating mechanism grey yes VT9 -HB Rotary operating mechanism yellow yes VT9 -HC Rotary operating mechanism grey no VT9 -HD Rotary operating mechanism grey no VT9 -HE Knob black no VT9 -HE Knob black yes VT9 -HF Knob red yes VT9 -HG Coupling driver black -- IP4 yes yes -- VT9 -HG Coupling driver yellow -- IP4 yes yes -- VT9 -HH Coupling driver black -- IP66 yes no -- VT9 -HH Coupling driver yellow -- IP66 yes no -- VT9 -HJ Extension shaft, can be shortened VT9 -HJ Extension shaft, telescopic / Siemens LV 6

155 RP-BD-CK PS PS PS SP SV RP-BD-CK PS PS PS SP SV RP-BD-CK Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching Function VT9-8LA mechanical interlocking VT9-8LB mechanical parallel switching Mechanical interlocks make sure that two circuit breakers cannot trip simultaneously, but always just individually. Both circuit breakers may be switched off simultaneously. Interlocking can be used between two VT circuit breakers or between one VT and one VT circuit breaker. Both circuit breakers must be furnished with rotary operating mechanisms (at least one of them with a rotary operating mechanism and knob). When using a mechanical interlock it is required to comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and in the table. Mechanical interlocks for parallel switching are for simultaneous switching of two circuit breakers. Parallel switching can be used between two VT circuit breakers or between VT and VT circuit breakers. Each circuit breaker must be furnished with a rotary operating mechanism and at least one of them with a knob. When using a mechanical interlock for parallel switching it is required to comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and in the table. L PS PS PS X TEST X TEST NSO_ NSO_4 Left switching unit Right switching unit VT -pole VT 4-pole VT -pole VT 4-pole X L X L X L X L mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm VT, P VT, 4P VT, P VT, 4P Left switching unit Right switching unit VT -pole VT 4-pole VT -pole VT 4-pole ) X L X L X L X L mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm VT, P x x VT, 4P x x VT, P x x VT, 4P x x ) Switching unit VT, 4P (4-pole version) must be located on the right side. TEST TEST NSO_ Siemens LV 6 /

156 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching Siemens AG VT9-8LC. Mechanical interlocking Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors so that they cannot both trip simultaneously, but only one of them at a time. Both circuit breakers may be turned off simultaneously. VT9-8LC mechanical interlocking is intended for two VT circuit breakers. VT9-8LC interlocking is intended for one BH6 circuit breaker and one VT. Circuit breakers may be in fixed, plug-in and withdrawable designs. Order No. of mechanical VT9-8LC VT9-8LC interlocking Circuit breaker types VT VT VT VT Circuit breaker installation in switchgear and controlgear assemblies Detailed information is included in the "Instructions for use", which is available on our website: assistance. NSO_66 min R = ON OFF... 7 ON OFF TEST TEST min. 8 / Siemens LV 6

157 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Design The motorized operating mechanism is equipped with spring storage units. The energy stored in the springs makes it possible to switch the circuit breaker on in less than 6 ms. Releasing the spring energy storage unit and tripping the circuit breaker is ensured by a closing coil. The motor mechanism can trip the circuit breaker in 9 ms. This method of tripping is suitable for most technological applications. When faster circuit breaker tripping is required (e.g., because an emergency STOP button was pressed), it is possible to use the mechanism in combination with an undervoltage trip unit or a shunt trip unit. The motorized operating mechanism front panel contains a selector switch for selecting the drive modes. There is also the possibility to remotely indicate the selector switch state. - The first mode is automatic remote control (selector switch in position AUTO). This is the standard position in automatic operation. - The second mode is manual control (selector switch position MANUAL). The motorized operating mechanism does not need any voltage to perform its function. Remote switching on and off in position AUTO is carried out with pushbuttons that must be connected to the drive unit connector. Furthermore, this position makes it is possible to control the circuit breaker with the pushbuttons located on the drive unit front panel. In MANUAL mode it is possible to switch on and off with the green and red pushbuttons located on the front panel of the motorized operating mechanism cover. The function of the remote control ON button in MANUAL mode is locked out, whereas the function of the remote control OFF button remains active for safety reasons. The motorized operating mechanism, as opposed to the circuit breaker, recognizes only two fixed positions. In the first position the circuit breaker is ON. When the circuit breaker is tripped in AUTO mode by the trip unit or shunt/undervoltage trip units, then because of mechanical link between the circuit breaker and the motor mechanism, a pulse will be generated to automatically wind up the spring of the storage unit. The motor mechanism can be wound up automatically by permanent closing switch S. In the second fixed position the circuit breaker is switched off and the loaded drive is ready to switch the breaker on after it has received the setting pulse. The motorized operating mechanism makes it possible to control the circuit breaker after the loss of control voltage. In MAN- UAL and AUTO modes, it is possible to wind up the storage unit by repeated rotation of the foldable handle. After charging the spring mechanism with spring energy, it is possible to switch the circuit breaker on and off with the control buttons located on the front panel of the motor mechanism. The front panel incorporates a storage unit status indicator to indicate what state the VT motor mechanism unit storage is in and whether it is possible to switch the circuit breaker on. The VT motor mechanism is also able to remotely indicate the storage status. A corresponding signal is issued to the terminal strip. VT motor mechanism have optional designs, alternatively with MANUAL/AUTO indication. The motorized operating mechanism can be furnished with an electromechanical operations counter that may be installed in the drive cover or outside of the circuit breaker (e.g. in the switchgear door). A metal holder included in the scope of supply of the external operations counter. Connecting is facilitated with connectors. The motorized operating mechanism can be locked in off position using as many as three padlocks with shank diameter max. 4. mm. A VT9 -MF cover can be attached to the ON-OFF switch of the motorized operating mechanism, and then sealed with sealing wire. The cover prevents turning on the circuit breaker from the drive panel. Extension cable VT9 -MF has a connector on one side that connects to the connector located on the motor mechanism and conductors on the other side that connect, for example, to a terminal block. Order No. VT9 -S. Operational voltage U e AC V DC V 4,48,, 4, 48,, Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Control pulse length for storing ms 4 ) Control pulse length for switching on ms...7 ) for switching off ms 4... ) Time before switching on ms <6 Time before switching off ms 9 Frequency of cycles ON/OFF contact making/min Frequency of cycles - instant successive contact making ON/OFF cycles Mechanical endurance contact making Input power AC VA DC W Protection AC 4, 48, V; AC V LSN 4C/; LSN C/ DC 4, 48, V; DC V LSN-DC 4C/; LSN-DC C/ Rated operating current V AC A/ AUTO / MANUAL switches I e /U e DC. A/ Order No. VT9 -MF Number of conductors Conductor cross sections S mm. Conductor lengths cm 6 ) For sequence of control pulses, see page /4. Siemens LV 6 /

158 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Siemens AG Function Circuit breaker switched on/off by the motorized operating mechanism Circuit breaker switched on by the motorized operating mechanism electrically by pushbutton ON Circuit breaker switched off by the motorized operating mechanism- electrically by pushbutton OFF 4 6 Main contacts Auxiliary switch NSO_ Main contacts Auxiliary switch 9 NSO_ Auxiliary switch Relative switch Relative switch Early switch accessory compartment accessory compartment Auxiliary switch Relative switch Relative switch Early switch 9 9 accessory compartment accessory compartment.y.y4.y.y4.y.y.y.y Early switch t [ms] accessory compartment.y.y4.y.y4.y.y.y.y Early switch 9 9 t [ms] accessory compartment Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breaker Wiring diagram Motor drive control circuits Q L+ ON B OFF Motor drive S Circuit breaker state Switched on Switched off by trip units, or by TEST button or by the trip pushbutton on the motorized operating mechanism Switched off manually or electrically by the operating mechanism Wiring diagram description Toggle positions of circuit breaker X NC NO NO S6 NC C C S MP X M PE N- YC P X4 Operations counter NSO_7 Symbol MP M P X X4 S S6 YC B ON OFF S Q Description Motorized operating mechanism VT9 -M.. Motor Energy storage device Connector to connect control circuits Connector for external operations counter Switch indicating AUTO/MANUAL modes Switching indicating energy storage (ready to on: NO-C) External operations counter VT9 -MF recommended wiring of the control circuits (not included in delivery) Make pushbutton Break pushbutton Switch for energy storage (switched on = automatic storage, may be continuously switched on) Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism /4 Siemens LV 6

159 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Tripping of the circuit breaker with a motorized operating mechanism by the trip unit (switch S automatic spring charging) Main contacts Auxiliary switch Auxiliary switch Relative switch Relative switch Early switch Early switch 6 6 Tripping of the circuit breaker with motorized operating mechanism by a shunt trip unit or undercurrent trip unit (switch S automatic spring charging) 6 6 t [ms] accessory compartment accessory compartment accessory compartment NSO_7 Wiring diagram Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism (electrical ON signal) and switched off by the shunt trip unit Control circuit L+ B X NC MP X Q Motor drive NO S6 C NC OFF 9 7 NO S C ON 4 S A 8 6 X4 J acc.c. no. PE N- YC N- Operations counter A VT9 -U. B or M P U< U B Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism (electrical ON signal) and switched off by undervoltage trip unit VT9 -S. NSO_ Main contacts Auxiliary switch Auxiliary switch Relative switch Relative switch t [ms] accessory compartment accessory compartment NSO_4 Motor drive control circuits Q L+ ON S B OFF Motor drive X NC NO NC NO S6 S C C A B SP-BHD-X... SV-BHD-X... or M P U< U MP X 8 6 PE N- X4 YC Operations counter A J N- B acc.c. NSO_7 Siemens LV 6 /

160 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Siemens AG Recommended actuating pulses Circuit breaker switched on/off by motorized operating mechanism - switch S permanently closed (automatic spring charging) or open HK RS R OFF > 4 > 88 7 IMP ON t [ms] Circuit breaker switched off by trip unit or shunt/undervoltage trip units and switched on by the motorized operating mechanism - switch S permanently closed (automatic spring charging) HK NSO_46 Description of charts Symbol HK PS RS R OFF IMP S IMP ON IMP OFF X Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breakers Circuit breaker state Switched on Description Main contacts Auxiliary switch Relative switch Circuit breaker closes instantly, by trip unit Pulse to charge spring mechanism Make pulse for motorized operating mechanism Break pulse for motorized operating mechanism Random segment of time Switched off by trip units, or by TEST button or by the trip pushbutton on the motorized operating mechanism Switched off manually or electrically by the operating mechanism lever positions of circuit breakers RS R OFF > 4 > 88 7 IMP ON t [ms] NSO_46 Circuit breaker switched off by trip unit or shunt/undervoltage trip units and switched on by motorized operating mechanism - switch S closed only for storing HK RS X + > 88 X > 4 4 IMP S R OFF > 7 IMP ON t [ms] NSO_47 /6 Siemens LV 6

161 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Use of VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism in the automatic standby system Wiring diagram of the motorized operating mechanism of the circuit breaker Recommended control pulses for switching the VT circuit breakers by the motorized operating mechanism after Circuit breaker was switched off by a shunt trip unit or by an undervoltage trip unit in the automatic standby system Control circuit L+ B Q ON OFF S HK > 4 7 IMP ON NSO_8 Motor drive X 9 7 NC NO NC NO S6 S C C 4 A B VT9 -U. VT9 -S. or M P U< U RS SV SP > 88 t [ms] MP X Symbol M P X X4 S YC B ON OFF S Q 8 6 PE N- X4 YC Cycle counter Description Motor Energy storage device Connector for connection of control circuits Connector for external cycle counter Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) mode External VT9 -MF cycle counter Recommended connection of control circuits (is not included in the motor drive supply) Pushbutton Pushbutton Switch for storage (closed = automatic storage; it can be closed permanently) Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism In a standby system, if a Bowden cable is used for mechanical interlocking, then an auxiliary trip unit should be used to switch the circuit breaker off. Otherwise, the first attempt of switching a standby circuit breaker may fail. A J N- B acc.c. NSO_79 HK RS SV SP Symbol HK RS SV SP IMP ON IMP OFF 4 IMP S X > 4 X + > 88 > > 7 IMP ON t [ms] Description Main contacts Relative switch Pulse for shunt trip unit Pulse for undervoltage trip unit Motorized operating mechanism make pulse Motorized operating mechanism storage pulse (generated by S switch) Switched on Switched off by trip units, TEST or REVISION pushbutton NSO_8 Switched off manually or by motorized operating mechanism electrically (wound up state) Siemens LV 6 /7

162 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories for plug-in version Overview Plug-in bases Position signalling VT9-4WL position signalling switch VT9-4PA Locking plug-in base against plug-in base inserting the circuit breaker/disconnector The plug-in version of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid exchange of the circuit breaker is needed. The plug-in base includes complete accessories for assembling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in plug-in design from the original fixed-mounted version The components of the plug-in base are: - supporting part of the plug-in base - connection sets (total of 6 terminals) for fitting on to the switching unit - interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching off of the circuit breaker for handling inserting and removal) - set of mounting bolts for securing circuit breaker into plug-in base (to secure plug-in base into switchboard, a set of mounting bolts is used that is included in delivery of the VT 76-.AA6-AA switching unit Main circuit The VT9-4TA connecting set is used for connecting with busbars or cable lugs and is included in the scope of supply of the VT of switching unit, pole for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connecting sets (see page /9) connections must comply with our recommendations (see page /44). Auxiliary circuits These are connected using a -wire VT9-4PL cable. Coding VT9-4WN coding set The plug-in base may be provided with a maximum of four switches (for 4-pole version, max. 6 switches) for signalling the connected/removed position. States of VT9-4WL switches in plug-in base according to the circuit breaker position Accessory compartment,,, 4 (9, ) ) Circuit breaker position Inserted Removed = contact open, = contact closed ) Accessory compartments 9 and are for 4-pole version only. Technical specifications Order No. VT9-4WL Rated operational voltage U e V AC 4 AC Rated isolation voltage U i V AC Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Rated operational current I e /U e AC- A/AC 4 V DC-. A/ V, A/ V, 4 A/ V Thermal current I th A 6 Arrangement of contacts Connector cross-section S mm.... Terminal protection IP (connected switch) A wiring diagram showing the circuit breaker situated in a plugin mounting base and outfitted with accessories, is shown on page /. Plug-in base with motorized operating mechanism 4 4 The plug-in base and the circuit breaker can be provided with a coding set, which prevents inserting any other circuit breaker into the plug-in base. Circuit breaker in plug-in version with motorized operating mechanism /8 Siemens LV 6

163 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories for plug-in version Recommended wiring of the circuit breaker in plug-in design with motorized operating mechanism L+ Motor drive control circuits Q Symbol MP M P X Description VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism Motor Energy storage device Terminal strip to connect control circuits B OFF ON S X4 S S6 YC Terminal strip for external operations counter Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) modes Switch to indicate full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C) External operations counter VT9 -MF Motor drive B Recommended wiring of the control circuits (control circuits not included in motorized operating mechanism delivery) ON Make pushbutton X OFF S Break pushbutton Switch to store energy NC S6 NO NC C S NO C M P Q Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism AC 4V LSN 4C/ AC 48V LSN 4C/ AC V LSN 4C/ AC V LSN C/ DC 4V LSN-DC 4C/ DC 48V LSN-DC 4C/ DC V LSN-DC 4C/ DC V LSN-DC C/ MP X 8 6 PE N- X4 YC Operating counter NSO_ Unplugging the circuit breaker with motorized operating mechanism Each time before removing the circuit breaker, we recommend turning first of all the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the motorized operating mechanism to the MANUAL position More operating information is available in the operating instructions Not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recommended wiring, could mean that the circuit breaker will not successfully switch on at the first attempt. Siemens LV 6 /9

164 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories for plug-in version Changes in states of switches when inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker State of circuit breaker before removing Siemens AG State of switches before removing inserted position State of switches after removing withdrawn position Accessory compartment, 4, (6... 9) ), 4, (6... 9) ) Lever position of the circuit breaker State of the main contacts VT9 -AC VT9 -AH Switched on Manually switched off or switched off by motorized operating mechanism 4 VT9 -AC VT9 -AH VT9 -AC VT9 -AH Switched off by trip units VT9 -AC 4 VT9 -AH VT9 -AC 4 - VT9 -AH VT9 -AC 4 VT9 -AH Switched off from switched-on state: by means of auxiliary trip unit, TEST pushbutton or by OFF pushbutton located on the motorized operating mechanism = contact open, = contact closed ) Accessory compartments 4,, 6 are for 4-pole version only. /4 Siemens LV 6

165 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories for withdrawable version Design Withdrawable version mounting base Position signalling VT9-4WL position signalling switch Circuit breaker installed VT9-4WA in withdrawable version base withdrawable version base The withdrawable version of the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid exchange of the circuit breaker and frequent checking of the circuit are needed. The withdrawable version base includes all parts needed to convert a circuit breaker or switch disconnector from fixedmounted version to withdrawable version. The components of the withdrawable version are: - withdrawable version base - movable side plates - connection sets (total of 6 terminals) for fitting onto the switching unit - interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching off of the circuit breaker when handling, inserting and withdrawing) - a set of mounting bolts needed to fasten the withdrawable version mounting base into the switchboard Main circuit The VT9-4TA connecting set is used for connecting with busbars or cable lugs and is included in delivery of the VT 76-.AA6-AA switching unit For connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connecting sets (see page /9) The type of connections must comply with our recommendations (see page /44). Auxiliary circuits These are connected using the VT9-4PL -wire cable. Coding VT9-4WN coding set The withdrawable version mounting base and the circuit breaker can be provided with coding set, which prevents inserting another circuit breaker into the withdrawable version mounting base. The withdrawable version can be provided with switches for signalling the position of the circuit breaker, see table. Technical specifications Order No. VT9-4WL Rated operational voltage U e V AC 4 AC Rated isolation voltage U i V AC Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Rated operational current I e /U e AC- A/AC 4 V DC-. A/DC V, A/DC V, 4A/DC V Thermal current I th A 6 Arrangement of contacts Connector cross-section S mm.... Terminal protection IP (connected switch) For wiring diagram of the circuit breaker in withdrawable device with accessories, see page /. States of VT9-4WL switches in withdrawable version according to circuit breaker and lockout positions State of switch Circuit breaker and lockout position Accessory compartment... 4,7 6, 8 (9, ) ) (9, ) ) 4 Inserted and unlocked Withdrawn and unlocked Removed and unlocked = contact open, = contact closed ) Accessory compartments 9 and are for 4-pole version only. Operating state is always in locked-out position In locked-out position, it is possible to lock the withdrawable device, so that the circuit breaker cannot be switched on (for more detailed information, see Advantages and enhanced safety for operator ). 4 4 Siemens LV 6 /4

166 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories for withdrawable version Locking Siemens AG Wiring diagram description Locking the circuit breaker Locking the withdrawable version in withdrawable version base against inserting the circuit base against tampering breaker Withdrawable version with motorized operating mechanism Symbol MP M P X X4 S S6 YC B ON OFF S Q Description VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism Motor Energy storage device Terminal strip to connect control circuits Terminal strip for external operations counter Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) modes Switch to indicate full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C) External operations counter VT9 -MF Recommended wiring of the control circuits (control circuits not included in motorized operating mechanism delivery) Make pushbutton Break pushbutton Switch to charge spring mechanism Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism AC 4 V LSN 4C/ AC 48 V LSN 4C/ AC V LSN 4C/ AC V LSN C/ DC 4 V LSN-DC 4C/ DC 48 V LSN-DC 4C/ DC V LSN-DC 4C/ DC V LSN-DC C/ Recommended wiring of the circuit breaker in withdrawable version with motorized operating mechanism L+ B Motor drive control circuits Q OFF ON S Inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker with motorized operating mechanism Each time before inserting or withdrawing the circuit breaker, we recommend placing the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the motorized operating mechanism to MANUAL position More operating information is available in the operating instructions Not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recommended wiring could mean that the circuit breaker will not successfully turn on at the first attempt. Motor drive X NC S6 NO NC C S NO C M P MP X 8 6 X4 PE N- YC Operating counter NSO_ /4 Siemens LV 6

167 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories for withdrawable version Changes in states of switching unit when inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker Circuit breaker before insertion Circuit breaker before withdrawal Accessory compartment State before inserted/withdrawn position State after inserted/withdrawn position State of switches before insertion State of switches after insertion - withdrawn position - inserted position State of switches before withdrawal State of switches after withdrawal - inserted position - withdrawn position, 4, (6... 9) ),4, (6... 9) ) Lever position of circuit breaker State of the main contacts VT9 -AC 4 VT9 -AD VT9 -AC 4 VT9 -AD Switched on VT9 -AC 4 VT9 -AD VT9 -AC 4 VT9 -AD VT9 -AC 4 VT9 -AD VT9 -AC 4 VT9 -AD Manually switched off or by operating mechanism Switched off by trip units Switched off from switched-on state: by means of auxiliary trip unit, TEST pushbutton or by OFF pushbutton on the motorized operating mechanism = contact open, = contact closed ) Accessory compartments 6 to 9 are for 4-pole version only. Siemens LV 6 /4

168 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Insulating barriers and terminal covers Siemens AG Overview Use of insulating barriers and terminal covers for circuit breakers and switch disconnectors Fixed-mounted version Front connection Terminals,, -If U e = AC 4 V, it is necessary to use VT9-8CE insulating barriers or VT9-8CB terminal covers. - For the connection of the main circuit to terminals,,, insulated conductors, flexibars or rear connection terminals are not used. It is necessary to use VT9-8CE insulating barriers or VT9-8CB terminal cover. Terminals, 4, 6 - If the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is connected to the the power supply with terminals, 4, 6 and if Ue = AC 4 V, it is necessary to use VT9-8CE insulating barriers or a VT9-8CB terminal cover. - If insulated conductors are not used for connecting the main circuit to terminals, 4, 6, and flexibars or rear connections are not used, then it is necessary to use VT9-8CE insulating barriers or VT9-8CB terminal covers. Rear connection Neither insulating barriers nor terminal covers have to be used. Plug-in and withdrawable versions Neither insulating barriers nor terminal covers have to be used. B = C = 8 D VT9-8CE B = ON ON ON 7 OFF OFF OFF TEST TEST TEST A A A C = NSO_9 B = B = A Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switchdisconnector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for connecting using insulated conductors, cables, flexibars or with rear connection) A Minimum insulation length of bare conductors (using VT9-8CE insulating barriers from mm to max. mm, or by adding additional insulation for the conductors with barriers to obtain at least A value) A Minimum distance: between the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated conductors and busbars) between the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and busbar between two circuit breaker/switch-disconnectors situated vertically above one another between uninsulated connections of two circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors above one another B, C Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall D Minimum distance between uninsulated conductors /44 Siemens LV 6

169 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Insulating barriers and terminal covers D > mm Busbar max. mm Cable max. mm Flexibar NSO_6 AC U e V 4 V V 69 V ) VT H wired with I k ka > ka 6 ka >... ka ka >... ka ka VT N wired with I k 6 ka 6 ka ka ka ka C < 8 mm A (mm) D mm A (mm) A (mm) A (mm) D mm A (mm) A (mm) A (mm) C 8 mm D mm A (mm) A (mm) ) I k = max. short-circuit current in the protected circuit (rms). Siemens LV 6 /4

170 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Dimensional drawings - -pole, fixed-mounted version Fixed-mounted version, front connection Siemens AG < AC 4 V... < AC 4 V 4 6 TEST 4 ON OFF Ø Drilling pattern Fixed-mounted version, front connection with VT9 4-4TF, VT9-4TF connecting set R 94 NSO_7 4 x Ø ON OFF TEST NSO_6 Ø Ø 8 Ø VT9-4-4TF Ø 8 VT9--4TF /46 Siemens LV 6

171 Siemens AG Fixed-mounted version, front connection (VT9-4TF connecting set) VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings ON OFF TEST NSO_6 4 6 x Ø 8.4 Fixed-mounted version, rear connection (VT9-4RC connecting set) x Ø (M x ) ON OFF TEST NSO_ Ø R Siemens LV 6 /47

172 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Siemens AG Fixed-mounted version, front connection (VT9-4ED connecting set) ON OFF TEST Ø NSO_67 4. Fixed-mounted version, front connection (VT9-4EE connecting set) TEST ON OFF x Ø NSO_69 /48 Siemens LV 6

173 Fixed-mounted version, rotary operating mechanism Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings 6 NSO_7 VT VT9 -HA.,-HB. VT9 -HE.,-HF- TEST Fixed-mounted version, rotary operating mechanism with adjustable knob 7 7 NSO_7 7 4 VT VT9 -HA.,-HB. VT9 -HE.,-HF. 4 VT9 -HG.,-HH. VT9 -HJ. 6 Outside surface of cabinet door TEST (-HJ) 7 4 (-HJ) 6 Cabinet door cut-out min x Ø 6. Ø NSO_7 Hinge of cabinet door Siemens LV 6 /49

174 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Siemens AG Fixed-mounted version, with VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism MANUAL AUTO 7 TEST NSO_ Opening dimensions in cabinet door for external operations counter NSO_ 7 R max 4 / Siemens LV 6

175 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Dimensional drawings - -pole, plug-in version VT9-4PA plug-in base Drilling patterns x Ø x Ø 6. L R Ø 4+8 mm NSO_ Ø Plug-in version, VT9-8CB motorized operating mechanism L R 8 Ø 4+8 mm NSO_8 7 Siemens LV 6 /

176 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Plug-in version Siemens AG ON 8 OFF TEST NSO_ Plug-in version, rear connection with VT9-4RC connecting set Drilling pattern x Ø 6. ON OFF TEST. Ø 4. NSO_ / Siemens LV 6

177 Plug-in version, with rotary operating mechanism Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings TEST NSO_9 7 Plug-in version, with VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism MANUAL AUTO Ø 4, max. TEST 4 6 NSO_9 8 Siemens LV 6 /

178 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Siemens AG Dimensional drawings - -pole, withdrawable version VT9-8CB withdrawable version base Drilling pattern x Ø x Ø 6. L R Ø 4+8 mm NSO_ Ø Withdrawable version base, with VT9-8CB terminal cover L R Ø 4+8 mm 4 6 NSO_ /4 Siemens LV 6

179 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Withdrawable version Operating position Checking position ON OFF TEST 4 6 NSO_ Withdrawable version, rear connection with VT9-4RC connecting set Operating position Checking position 9 6 4xØ ON SP SV PS OFF PS PS PS PS TEST Ø 4 NSO_ Siemens LV 6 /

180 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Withdrawable version, with rotary operating mechanism Siemens AG Operating position Checking position 4 TEST NSO_ Withdrawable version, with motorized operating mechanism Operating position Checking position MANUAL AUTO Ø 4, max. TEST 4 6 NSO_ 8 /6 Siemens LV 6

181 Dimensional drawings - 4-pole, fixed-mounted version Fixed-mounted version, front connection Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings > AC 4 V... < AC 4 V N 4 6 ON OFF x Ø TEST R 94 N NSO_9 4. Ø Fixed-mounted version, front connection with VT9 4-4TF + VT9 4-4TF, VT9-4TF + VT9-4TF connecting set ON OFF TEST NSO_ Ø Ø 8 Ø (-HJ) Ø 8 (-HJ) Siemens LV 6 /7

182 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Fixed-mounted version, front connection with VT9-4TF + VT9-4TF connecting set 8 Siemens AG ON OFF TEST NSO_4 8 6 x Ø 8. Fixed-mounted version, rear connection with VT9-4RC + VT9-4RC connecting set x Ø 6. ON OFF TEST NSO_6 4 Ø R /8 Siemens LV 6

183 Fixed-mounted version, with rotary operating mechanism Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings N NSO_7 VT VT9 -HA.,-HB. VT9 -HE.,-HF. 4 7 TEST N Fixed-mounted version, with door-coupling operating mechanism N 7 7 NSO_ VT VT9 -HA.,-HB. VT9 -HE.,-HF. VT9 -HG.,-HH. VT9 -HJ. Outside surface of cabinet door TEST 4 N (-HJ) 7 4 (-HJ) 6 Cabinet door cut-out min x Ø 6. Ø NSO_9 Hinge of cabinet door Siemens LV 6 /9

184 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Siemens AG Fixed-mounted version, VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism MANUAL AUTO Ø 4, max. TEST 4 49 NSO_ 47 Opening dimensions in cabinet door for external operations counter 9 NSO_ 7 R max 4 /6 Siemens LV 6

185 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Dimensional drawings - 4-pole, plug-in version VT9-4PA4 plug-in base Drilling patterns x Ø 6. N x Ø 6. L N Ø 8 Ø 4+8 mm 4 6 R NSO_ Plug-in base, with VT9-8CB4 terminal cover N L R Ø 4+8 mm N NSO_6 7 Siemens LV 6 /6

186 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Plug-in version Siemens AG ON 8 OFF TEST 8 NSO_ Plug-in version, rear connection with VT9-4RC + VT9-4RC connecting set Drilling pattern ON 8 OFF TEST 8 7. Ø 4. NSO_8 4 x Ø /6 Siemens LV 6

187 Plug-in version with rotary operating mechanism Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings 8 TEST 8 NSO_9 7 Plug-in version, with VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism N MANUAL AUTO 8 Ø 4, max. TEST N 4 6 NSO_9 8 8 Siemens LV 6 /6

188 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Siemens AG Dimensional drawings - 4-pole, withdrawable version VT9-4WA4 withdrawable version base Drilling pattern x Ø 6. N 4 79 L N R Ø 4+8 mm 4 6 Ø NSO_ Withdrawable version with VT9-8CB4 terminal cover L N R 4 4 Ø 4+8 mm N 4 6 NSO_ /64 Siemens LV 6

189 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Withdrawable version 8 Operating position Checking position ON OFF TEST NSO_ Withdrawable version, rear connection with VT9-4RC + VT9-4RC connecting set Drilling pattern ON 8 6 OFF TEST 8 7. Ø 4 NSO_4 4 x Ø Siemens LV 6 /6

190 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Siemens AG Withdrawable version, with rotary operating mechanism 8 Operating position Checking position TEST NSO_47 Withdrawable version, with VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism 8 Operating position Checking position MANUAL AUTO Ø 4, max. TEST NSO_ /66 Siemens LV 6

191 Siemens AG VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A 4 Catalog Technical Information VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A 4/ General data 4/ Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors 4/4 Accessories and Components 4/4 Trip units, switch-disconnector units, signalling unit, auxiliary switches, shunt trip units, undervoltage trip units 4/ Manual/motorized operating mechanisms 4/6 Mounting accessories 4/7 Further accessories VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A 4/8 Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors 4/9 Accessories and Components 4/9 Trip units Siemens LV 6

192 VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog General data Siemens AG Overview Connecting sets 4 Switching unit Accessories NSO_8a Molded case circuit breaker Multiple box terminals Box terminals Circular conductor terminal Multiple feed-in terminal Multiple feed-in terminal Rear connection Front connection Rear connection Rotary operating mechanism Mechanical interlocking Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire Motor operating mechanism Shunt trip unit Undervoltage trip unit Switch Lockingtype lever Sealing inset 9 4 Extension cable Terminal cover Terminal cover Insulating barriers Insulating barriers Insulating grommets Mounting bolts 4/ Siemens LV 6

193 Siemens AG VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Overview Switching unit The switching unit includes: VT9-8CE insulating barriers connecting sets for front connection - busbars connection The switching unit must be outfitted with: a trip unit ETU DP, MP or UP (circuit breaker) or VT9 4-6DT switch disconnector unit For the withdrawable version, the VT4 7-AA8-AA switching unit requires VT9-4WA withdrawable version base. The withdrawable version base must be fitted with: - x VT9-4EF connection set (front connection) or - VT9-4RD (rear connection) We recommend fitting the switching unit with: - VT9-4SA4 mounting bolts set (4 x M8 x 6) Circuit breaker The circuit breakers consist of a -pole switching unit (fixedmounted or withdrawable version) and a trip unit, which is available with a choice of different characteristics. Switch disconnector The switch disconnector consists of a switching unit (fixedmounted or withdrawable version) and a switch disconnector unit. Selection and ordering data Switching units Rated current I n Switching capacity I cu DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. A ka kg Fixed-mounted version, -pole 6 B VT4 7-AA-AA unit. 4 Withdrawable version, -pole 6 B VT4 7-AA8-AA unit. * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 4/

194 VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog - Accessories and Components Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Selection and ordering data for accessories Siemens AG 4 Rated current I n Set current of the inversetime delayed overload trip units L I r DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. A A kg Electronic trip units (ETU) Distribution protection, ETU DP, LI function Provides protection for lines and transformers... B VT9 4-6AC unit B VT9 46-6AC unit B VT9 48-6AC unit B VT9 4-6AC unit.86 Motor/generator protection, ETU MP, LI function Provides protection for motors and generators Suitable also for protecting lines and transformers... B VT9 4-6AP unit B VT9 46-6AP unit B VT9 48-6AP unit B VT9 4-6AP unit.9 Universal protection, ETU UP, LSI function For protecting complicated loads or those not specified in advance... B VT9 4-6AD unit B VT9 46-6AD unit B VT9 48-6AD unit B VT9 4-6AD unit. Switch-disconnector unit Switch-disconnector unit B VT9 4-6DT unit.474 Signalling unit Signalling unit for trip units ETU, LP and UP B VT9-6AE unit.67 S Rated control supply voltage U s DT Order No. PS* Weight approx. kg Auxiliary switches AC/DC 6... V/DC V B VT9 -AF unit.4 AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AF unit.4 Shunt trip units AC/DC 4 V B VT9 -SF unit.99 AC/DC 48 V B VT9 -SG unit. AC/DC V B VT9 -SH unit. AC V/DC V B VT9 -SJ unit. AC/DC 4 V B VT9 -SK unit. AC/DC V B VT9 -SL unit. Undervoltage trip units AC/DC 4 V B VT9 -UF unit. AC/DC 48 V B VT9 -UG unit. AC/DC V B VT9 -UH unit. AC V/DC V B VT9 -UJ unit. AC/DC 4 V B VT9 -UK unit. AC/DC V B VT9 -UL unit. 4/4 Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

195 Siemens AG VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog - Accessories and Components Manual/motorized operating mechanisms Overview Rotary operating mechanism The rotary operating mechanism assembly consists of: VT9 -HA rotary operating mechanism VT9 -HE/HF hand drive lever In order to operate the circuit breaker through the switchgear cabinet door the following components are additionally needed: VT9 -HJ extension shaft VT9 -HG/HG coupling driver Selection and ordering data Version DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg Rotary operating mechanism Rotary operating mechanism (hand drive unit) lockable with padlock B VT9 -HA unit. Hand drive lever lockable with padlock black B VT9 -HE unit.6 lockable with padlock red B VT9 -HF unit.6 Coupling driver Degree of protection IP44 B VT9 -HG unit.6 Degree of protection IP66 B VT9 -HG unit.4 4 Extension shaft length 6 mm B VT9 -HJ unit. Mechanical Interlocks Mechanical interlocks for the rotary operating mechanism B VT9-8LA unit. for circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version Both circuit breakers must be equipped with a rotary operating mechanism and a knob. Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire is intended for fixed-mounted and withdrawable versions. For circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version B VT9-8LC unit.4 For one fixed-mounted and one withdrawable circuit breaker/switch disconnector B VT9-8LC unit.4 For circuit breaker/switch disconnector, withdrawable version B VT9-8LC4 unit. Motorized operating mechanism Motorized operating mechanism; Rated control voltage AC/DC V B VT9 -MN unit 4, AC V/DC V B VT9 -MQ unit 4,44 Motorized operating mechanism with operations counter; Rated control voltage AC/DC V B VT9 -MN unit 4,4 AC V/DC V B VT9 -MQ unit 4,4 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 4/

196 VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories Siemens AG Overview Withdrawable version When connecting the main circuit, the recommendations on page / as well as the deionizing space (see page /4) must be observed The withdrawable version base must be fitted with: - VT4 7-AA8-AA switching unit, -pole version; - x VT9-4EF connection set (front connection) or VT9-4RD (rear connection) We recommend attaching the withdrawable version base to the switchboard with: - VT9-4SA4 mounting bolt set (4 x M8 x6) Selection and ordering data Version Max. permissible cross-section S mm Withdrawable version base Withdrawable version base for -pole circuit breaker/switch disconnector Type of cables DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg B VT9-4WA unit, 4 Connecting sets Box terminals, double x Cu/Al cables B VT9 4-4TG unit.47 For connecting four mm cables, it is possible to use two VT9 4-4TG connecting sets. Not for VT4 7-AA-AA switching unit. Box terminals, Cu/Al cables B VT9 4-4TF unit.66 For connecting three mm cables, it is possible to combine the VT9 4-4TG connecting set with the VT9 4-4TF connecting set. Not for VT4 7-AA-AA switching unit. Rear connection Busbars Up to A B VT9 4-4RC unit.4 Up to 6 A B VT9-4RC unit.678 Front connection for withdrawable version Busbars B VT9-4EF unit.7 Rear connection for withdrawable version Busbars B VT9-4RD unit,4 Terminals for circular conductors... Cu/Al cables for cables B VT9-4TF unit. for cables B VT9-4TF unit.948 for 4 cables B VT9 4-4TF unit.88 4/6 Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

197 Siemens AG VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Catalog - Accessories and Components Further accessories Selection and ordering data Accessories Version DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg Insulating barriers In case of reversed connection (supply to terminals, 4, 6), the insulating barriers must also be installed on the bottom side. Not included in standard scope of delivery of switching units in fixedmounted version. For switching unit, fixed-mounted version B VT9-8CE unit.64 For withdrawable version B VT9-8CF unit.4 Terminal cover protection Increases degree of protection of connection point to IP. Intended for withdrawable version with front connection. We recommend installation of terminal cover protection on both sides of the withdrawable device for increasing safety when maintaining the electrical device. For circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version with rear connection For withdrawable version with front connection B VT9-8CD unit.87 B VT9-8CC unit.68 4 Insulating grommets Intended for fixed-mounted version of switching unit and withdrawable version with rear connection. The insulating connecting sets insulate connecting sets of rear connection from switchgear structure. We recommend installation on all connecting sets with rear connection. For rear connection B VT9-8CG unit. Locking device for knob B VT9 -HL unit.4 Enables locking circuit breaker in switched off manually position. For locking, up to three padlocks with a max. shank diameter of 6 mm may be used Bolt sealing insert B VT9-8BN unit. Provides sealing for: Accessory compartment cover Connecting cable B VT9-4PL unit. For connecting circuit breaker accessories to withdrawable version ( wire) Position indicator B VT9-4WL unit. Signals circuit breaker/switch disconnector position in withdrawable version Mounting bolts B VT9-4SA4 unit.44 For withdrawable version ON button cover B VT9 -MF unit.9 For motorized operating mechanism, cover can be sealed with sealing wire * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 4/7

198 VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Technical specifications Siemens AG Description VT4 Circuit breakers Switch disconnector Order number VT4 7-AA-AA VT9 4-6DT VT4 7-AA8-AA Standards EN , IEC 947- EN , IEC 947- Approval marks 4 Number of poles Rated current I n A, 6, 8, -- Rated normal current I u A Rated operational current I e A -- Rated operational voltage U e V AC max. 69 AC max. 69, DC max. 44 Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 8 Rated insulation voltage U i V 69 Utilization category (selectivity) AC 69 V A, B -- Utilization category (switching mode) AC 69 V DC 44 V AC- B DC- B Rated short-time withstand current U e =AC 69 V I cw /t ka/ s Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (rms value) ) I cu /U e available, -- unavailable AC 8 ka/v AC 6 ka/4v AC 4 ka/v AC ka/69v Off-time at I cu ms -- Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (rms value) I cs /U e AC 4 ka/v AC 6 ka/4v AC ka/v AC ka/69v -- Rated short-circuit making capacity (peak value) I cm /U e 4 ka/ac 4 V ka/ac 4 V, ka/dc 44 V Losses per pole at I n = A W Mechanical endurance cycles Electrical endurance (U e = AC 4 V ) cycles 4 Switching frequency cycles/hr Operating force N Front-side device protection IP4 Terminal protection IP Operating conditions Reference ambient temperature C 4 Ambient temperature range Working environment dry and tropical climate Degree of pollution Max. elevation m Seismic resistance m/s g at 8... Hz Design modifications Front/rear connection / Plug-in design -- Withdrawable design Accessories Switches-auxiliary/relative/signal/early Shunt trip unit Undervoltage trip unit Manual front operating mechanism Mechanical interlocking to the rotary operating mechanism, by Bowden wire Motorized operating mechanism/with operations counter Locking-type lever Bolt sealing inset/additional cover for trip unit / /--/-- / /-- ) If the circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals, 4, 6, output terminals,, ), I cu does not change. -- 4/8 Siemens LV 6

199 Siemens AG VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Overview The electronic trip unit is a separate and interchangeable unit, which has to be ordered in addition to the VT4 7-AA..-AA switching unit. By exchanging the trip unit, the range of the circuit breaker s rated current can be easily changed. Trip units for the VT4 7-AA-AA switching unit are available in four current ranges I n =, 6, 8 and A. The trip units cover rated currents ranging from to A. Tripping characteristics Several different trip units are available. Some have adjustable characteristics (in order to match the protected device and to achieve the required selectivity): ETU DP trip units t NSO_7 ETU DP trip units have one type of characteristics with adjustable I r and I rm. ETU MP trip units t NSO_74 Ir Ir L L tr Ii Ii I I I I ETU MP trip units have more characteristics with adjustable I r, t r and I rm. ETU UP trip units ETU UP trip units have universal characteristics, with the greatest variability in adjustment: I r, t r, I sd, t sd and I i. Trip units ETU DP, MP and UP - description of function Proper functioning of trip units does not depend on the waveform of the current in the main circuit. The function of the trip unit is supported by a microprocessor, which processes a sampled signal of the power circuit and recalculates it to obtain an rms value. Therefore, digital trip units are suitable for protecting circuits where the sinusoidal current is distorted by high harmonics (e.g. circuits with controlled rectifiers, power factor compensators, pulse loading, and the like). All the trip units protect a circuit against short-circuiting and overloading. Setting of selective cascading of circuit breakers is especially enabled by the ETU UP trip unit. Tripping characteristics of the trip units are independent of the ambient temperature. The trip unit is attached to the switching unit by two bolts. The translucent cover over the adjustment controls can be sealed (with sealing wire). Adjustment of the tripping characteristics for ETU DP and MP trip units The tripping characteristics of the trip units are defined by standard EN The characteristics are adjusted in two zones, using latched switches located on the trip unit: L is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal protection. I is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against ultimate short-circuit currents. For ETU MP trip units, the time delay can be set at or ms.. Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L The time-dependent trip unit ETU DP is adjusted with one I r switch. The I r switch adjusts the circuit breaker s rated current. The characteristic moves along the current axis. The trip unit is set to one characteristic. The time-dependent trip unit ETU MP is adjusted with two switches, I r and t r. The first (I r ) switch adjusts the circuit breaker s rated current. The characteristic moves along the current axis. Turning the other switch (t r ) adjusts the time after which the circuit breaker will trip while passing through 7. I r. The tripping characteristic thus moves along the time axis. With the t r switch it is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics: - Four characteristics are available for motor protection. Breaking times correspond to trip unit classes A,,,. By changing t r, it is possible to select the characteristics according to the required motor starting (light, medium, heavy or very heavy starting). - Four characteristics are available for protecting transformers and lines. It is not possible to turn the device back on right after the timedependent trip unit has been actuated and the circuit breaker has tripped. The trip unit must be allowed to cool off (it has a thermal memory). The memory can be disabled by turning the restart switch from the normal T t position to the T position. The time-dependent trip unit remains active, and only its thermal memory is deactivated. The thermal memory should be switched off only in justified cases, and with the knowledge that the temperature could rise in the protected device, causing repeated tripping.. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit (short-circuit trip unit) I The time-independent instantaneous ETU DP and ETU MP trip units are adjusted with one switch, I i. The I i switch sets the shortcircuit current that, when reached or exceeded, causes instantaneous tripping of the circuit breaker. Regulation of the short-circuit trip unit provides settings for the characteristic appropriate for protecting lines and motors. The wave form of the tripping characteristic is adjusted with latched switches located on the trip unit s front panel according to the needs of the protected device. A visual demonstration on setting the tripping characteristics is available in the SIMARIS design software (Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution). 4 Siemens LV 6 4/9

200 VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Siemens AG 4 Tripping characteristics of ETU DP and MP trip units with load The tripping characteristics from the cold state indicate the tripping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the circuit breaker. The tripping characteristics tripped from warm state, indicate the tripping times during which it is assumed that, before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic trip units are independent of the ambient temperature and are plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of a tripping in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a steady state, as shown in the following graph. The steady state is a period during which the characteristics do not change. If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least minutes, the tripping times will be cut by a half. If the load is less than 7% of I r, the tripping time does not become shorter. k [-] NSO_7 T ETU DP and MP tripping times shortening with load T - When tripping from the trip unit s warm state, the tripping time of the characteristic is cut short during the standstill time t u by coefficient k. Thermal standstill time of the characteristics For all kinds of characteristics t r, the thermal standstill time for ETU DP and MP trip units is t u min. During this time, the short-circuit tripping time t v is cut short from the cold-state characteristic by the coefficient k. The real tripping time is t s = k. t v Example The shortening constant can be read from the diagram. With steady current 8% of I r the real tripping time will be shortened to: t s =.74. t v k [ ] time shortening coefficient I r [A] adjusted rated current of the trip unit t v [s] tripping time of the trip unit derived from the characteristic t s [s] real tripping time of the trip unit tripped from warm state t u [s] standstill period for particular characteristics Trip units are set by the manufacturer I r = min Restart = T (t) I rm = min, ms t r = TV, min I r [%] 4/ Siemens LV 6

201 Siemens AG VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Adjustment of tripping characteristics, trip unit ETU UP t NSO_46 I r L S I t r I sd I t OFF I t ON t sd I i The tripping characteristics of trip units are defined by standard EN The characteristics are adjusted in three zones using latched switches located on the trip unit: L - is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal protection. S - is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance short-circuit protection for lines. Intentional delay in tripping of these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selectivity of protective devices. This type of delay can be set only in self-contained trip units (full version). I - is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against ultimate short-circuiting without time delay. It - Characteristic setting in the ON position represents a constant value of energy passed through. If fuses are used as protective elements for outgoing branch feeders, it is possible to adjust the selective part of the characteristics to better suit the shape of the fuse characteristics.. Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L The time-dependent trip unit ETU UP is adjusted with two switches, I r and t r. The first switch, I r, adjusts the circuit breaker s rated current. The characteristics move along the current axis. Turning the second switch, t r, adjusts the time after which the circuit breaker will trip while passing through 7. I r. The tripping characteristics thus move on the time axis. A total of 8 characteristics can be set with the t r switch. Breaking times correspond to tripping classes A,,,. It is not possible to turn the device back on right after the timedependent trip unit has tripped the circuit breaker. The trip unit must be allowed to cool off (it has a thermal memory). The memory can be disabled by turning the restart switch from the normal T t position to the T position. The time-dependent trip unit remains active, and only its thermal memory is inactivated. The thermal memory should be switched off only in justified cases, and with the knowledge that there could be rising temperature in the protected device, causing repeated tripping. I. Delayed time-independent trip units S It is used to set up a selective cascade of circuit breakers. It is set up using specifications I sd and t sd. I sd is an n-multiple of current I r (I sd = n I r ). It is a short-circuit current that, within the span of I sd to I rm, will trip the circuit breaker with delay t sd, where t sd is a delay set up for switching off the trip unit. The delayed time-independent trip unit actuates the circuit breaker if the current in the circuit reaches at least the preset n- multiple and lasts at least the preset delay time t sd. The trip unit can be disabled by setting the parameter n (I sd = n I r ) into the position. Parameter t sd can be set to values with respect to the energy that passed through l t (switch position l t on). The preset time values are then applicable for currents higher than x current I r. Tripping times of k-multiples of I r for k < are defined as follows: t = t v k. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit I It is set up with parameter I rm. I rm is a short-circuit current that, when reached or exceeded, causes the circuit breaker to switch off instantaneously. It is set up directly in ka on the trip unit. The wave form of the tripping characteristic is adjusted using latched switches located on the trip unit s front panel to match the needs of the protected device. A visual demonstration on setting the tripping characteristic is available in the SIMARIS design software (Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution). 4 Siemens LV 6 4/

202 VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Siemens AG 4 Tripping characteristics for ETU UP trip units with load The tripping characteristics from the cold state indicate the tripping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the circuit breaker. The tripping characteristics tripped from warm state indicate the tripping times during which it is assumed that, before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic trip units are independent of the ambient temperature and are plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of a tripping in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a steady state, as shown in the following diagram. The steady state is a period during which the characteristics do not change. If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least minutes, the tripping times will be cut by half. If the load is less than 7% of I r, the tripping time does not become shorter. k [-] NSO_7 T Example The shortening constant can be read from the diagram. With steady current 8% of I r, the real tripping time will be shortened to: t s =.74. t v k [ ] time shortening coefficient I r [A] adjusted rated current of trip unit t v [s] tripping time of the trip unit derived from the characteristics t s [s] real tripping time of the trip unit tripped from warm state t u [s] standstill period for particular characteristics Trip units are set by the manufacturer I r = min Restart = T (t) I rm = min t r = min t v = min, I t - ON I sd = min Trip units are set by the manufacturer I r = min Restart = T (t) I rm = min, ms t r = TV, t (t), min I sd = ms, min I =. I r I r [%] T - When tripping from the warm state, the tripping time of the characteristics are cut short during the standstill time t u by coefficient k. Thermal standstill time of the characteristics For all kinds of characteristics t r the thermal standstill period for ETU UP trip units is t u min. During this time, the short-circuit tripping time t v is cut short from the cold-state characteristics by the coefficient k. The real tripping time is ts = k.t v 4/ Siemens LV 6

203 Siemens AG VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Trip units ETU DP - Distribution protection Provides protection for lines and transformers The VT AC trip unit is intended only for the VT4 7- AA..-AA switching units. Operation of the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is fitted with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning the switch on the front panel from position T (t) to position T (). After having disabled the thermal memory, the thermal tripping function remains active. A practical advantage of the trip unit is special tripping characteristics that provide for optimized use of transformers up to. I n. Another advantage of this trip unit is the simple adjustment of the tripping characteristics. Set-up includes only the rated current in a range of.4 to. of I n and the short-circuit tripping level. Reaching 8% and % of I r is indicated by LED diodes on the front panel denoted as I > 8% and I > % of I r. Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover are four photocells for communicating with the VT9-6AE signalling unit. Tripping characteristics t [s] min. L In=6A n = A In=A n = 6 A In=A n = 8 A In=6A n = A I n = A I n = 6 A I n = 8 A I n = A.... I r max I i [ka] I i [ka] 6. I i [ka] I i [ka] I NSO_77 x I n I r I i Specifications for adjustable trip units Order No. Rated current I n A Overload Restart Instantaneous short protection I r circuit protection I i A, 7. 44, 6 7, 8., T () VT9 4-6AC, 4 T (t)., 6 7, 9 4,, 6.8 7, 9., 4, 6 T () VT9 46-6AC 6 4, 4 T (t) 4 4, 48 6, 8 7, 6, 4 6, 4. 4, 4 48, T () VT9 48-6AC 8, 7 T () 4 6, , , 8 4, 4. 4, 48, 7, 6 T () VT9 4-6AC 6, 68 T () 7 7, , , 4 4 Siemens LV 6 4/

204 VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Siemens AG 4 Trip units ETU MP - Motor protection Direct protection of motors and generators Can protect lines and transformers The VT AP trip unit is intended only for the VT4 7- AA..-AA switching unit. The operation of the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch on the front panel from position T (t) to position T (). After having disabled the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains active. A practical advantage of the trip unit are specially designed tripping characteristics that provide for optimal exploitation of transformers up to. I n. It is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics on the trip unit. From these, in mode M, there are 4 characteristics for motor protection and another 4 characteristics in mode T V for protecting transformers and lines. The shape of each characteristic can be changed using a selector switch. When one or two phases fail, in the M-characteristic mode, the switch will open with a 4 s delay (so called undercurrent tripping). Another parameter for adjusting the trip unit is the rated current, which is adjusted in a range of.4 to. of I n and the short-circuit tripping level, for which it is possible to set the delay at or ms. The reaching of 8% and % of I r is indicated by LED diodes on the front panel denoted as I > 8% of I r and I > % of I r. Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover are two photocells for communicating with the VT9-6AE signalling unit. Specifications for adjustable trip units Order No. Rated Overload rent In tion I r tection I cur- protec- t r (7. x I r) Restart Instantaneous short circuit pro- A A S ka ka ms, 7 (TV ).. 44, 6 (TV ) T () 7, 8 (TV ) VT9 4-6AP, (TV ), 4 (TV ) 4., 6 8 (TV 8) T (t). 7, 9 (TV )., (TV ). 4 Order No. Rated Overload rent In tion I r tection I cur- protec- t r (7. x I r) Restart Instantaneous short circuit pro- A A S ka ka ms, 6 (TV ). 7, 9 (TV ) T (), (TV ) 6 VT9 46-6AP 6 4, 6 (TV ) 4, 4 (TV ) 8 4, 48 8 (TV 8) T (t) 4, (TV ) 7, 6 (TV ).8, 4 (TV ) , 48 (TV ) T () 4, (TV ) 6 VT9 48-6AP 8 7, 6 (TV ) 6, 68 (TV ) 9 7, 76 8 (TV 8) T (t) 4 8, 866 (TV ) 99, (TV ) 4, 4 (TV ) , 48 (TV ) T (), (TV ) 9 VT9 4-6AP 7, 6 (TV ) 4 6, 68 (TV ) 7, 76 8 (TV 8) 7 8, 866 (TV ) 7 9 T (t) 99, (TV ). 4/4 Siemens LV 6

205 Siemens AG VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Tripping characteristic ETU MP t [s] min. I r max. I r t r ms ms I i NSO_78 TV t [s] min. I r max. I r t r ms ms I i NSO_79 M L In=6A n = A In=A n = 6 A In=A n = 8 A In=6A n = A I n = A I n = 6 A I n = 8 A I n = A t r x I n I I i [ka] I i [ka] I i [ka] I i [ka] L In=6A n = A In=A n = 6 A In=A n = 8 A In=6A n = A I n = A I n = 6 A I n = 8 A I n = A t r x I n I I i [ka] I i [ka] I i [ka] I i [ka] 4 Siemens LV 6 4/

206 VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Siemens AG Trip units ETU UP - Universal protection For protecting complicated loads or those not specified in advance The VT AD trip unit is intended for the VT4 7-AA..- AA switching unit only. The UP trip unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning the restart switch on the front panel from the position T (t) to the position T (). After the thermal memory has been disabled, the thermal trip unit remains active. A practical advantage of the UP trip unit is its maximum flexibility for adjusting the tripping characteristics. With its possibility for setting I t = constant and I t = constant, it is optimal from the selectivity viewpoint for its interaction with fusing devices. The operational state 7% of I r is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green in a. s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load larger than % of I r this LED will turn red and just before tripping will begin to blink red. Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover are two photocells for communicating with the VT9-6AE signalling unit. Specifications for adjustable trip units 4 Order No. Rated current I n Overload protection t r (7. x I r ) Short delayed short I r circuit protection I sd =(n x I r ) t sd I t Restart Instantaneous short circuit protection I A A S n ms ka, 7.,. 44, 6, on T () 7, 8 4, 6. VT9 4-6AD, 7 6 8,, 4 8,., 6 9, off T (t) 7, 9 4, 6 4, 8,, 6.,.8 7, 9, on T ()., 4, 6 VT9 46-6AD 6 4, , 4, 4 8, 4 4, 48 9, off T (t) 6, 4, 6 8 7, 6 8,, 4., 6, 4, on T (). 4, 4 4, 6 VT9 48-6AD 8 48, 7 6 8,, 7 8, 4 6, 6 9, off T (t) 6 68, 7 4, , 8 8, 4, 4.,. 4, 48, on T (), 4, 6 VT9 4-6AD 7, , 6, 68 8, 7 7, 76 9, off T (t) 9 8, 866 4, 6 99, 8, 4 4/6 Siemens LV 6

207 Siemens AG VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Tripping characteristics ETU UP t [s] min. I r max. I i = ( ) x I r min I r t r I sd NSO_8 t v I i t [s] min. I r NSO_8 max. I r t r I sd t v I i I sd = ( ) x I r min I n = A I n = 6 A I n = 8 A I n = A L I i = ( ) x I r max I n = A I n = 6 A I n = 8 A I n = A L I sd = ( ) x I r max I n = A I n = 6 A I n = 8 A I n = A S t v [ms] (I t = OFF) t r [s] I i [ka]. 4. I i [ka]. 4. I i [ka] I i [ka] x I n I I n = A I n = 6 A I n = 8 A I n = A S t v [ms] (I t = ON) t r [s] I i [ka]. 4. I i [ka] I i [ka] I i [ka] x In I 4 Siemens LV 6 4/7

208 VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Tripping characteristics ETU UP Siemens AG 4 t [s] I n = A I n = 6 A I n = 8 A I n = A I n = A L I n = 6 A I n = 8 A I n = A min. S.. I r t v [ms] (I t = OFF) max. I sd = ( ) x I r min NSO_8 I r t r I sd t v I i I sd = ( ) x I r max I i [ka]. 4. I i [ka]. 4. I i [ka] I i [ka] t r [s] x I n I t [s] I n = A I n = 6 A I n = 8 A I n = A I n = A I n = 6 A I n = 8 A min. I n = A L S.. I r t v [ms] (I t = ON) max. I sd = ( ) x I r min NSO_8 I r t r I sd t v I i I sd = ( ) x I r max I i [ka]. 4. I i [ka]. 4. I i [ka] I i [ka] t r [s] x I n I 4/8 Siemens LV 6

209 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog Technical Information VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A / General data / Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors /4 Accessories and Components /4 Auxiliary switches and shunt trip units / Manual/motorized operating mechanisms /6 Mounting accessories /7 Further accessories VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A /8 Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors / Accessories and Components / Withdrawable version /4 Trip units /4 Signalling units / Auxiliary switches /6 Shunt trip units /7 Undervoltage trip units /8 Rotary operating mechanism /9 Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching / Motorized operating mechanism /4 Insulating barriers / Project Planning Assistance / Dimensional drawings Siemens LV 6

210 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog General data Siemens AG Overview Connecting sets 4 Switching unit Accessories NSO_9a Molded case circuit breaker Multiple box terminals Box terminals Circular conductor terminal Multiple feed-in terminal Multiple feed-in terminal Rear connection Front connection Rear connection Rotary operating mechanism Mechanical interlocking Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire Motor operating mechanism Shunt trip unit Undervoltage trip unit Switch Lockingtype lever Sealing inset 9 4 Extension cable Terminal cover Terminal cover Insulating barriers Insulating barriers Insulating grommets Mounting bolts / Siemens LV 6

211 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Overview Switching unit The switching unit includes: VT9-8CE insulating barriers Set of installation bolts (4x M8x8) Connecting sets for front connection - busbar connection The switching unit must be outfitted with: Trip unit ETU DP, MP or UP (circuit breaker) or VT9 6-6DT switch disconnector unit (switch disconnector) For the withdrawable version, the VT 76-AA8-AA switching unit additionally requires VT9-4WA4 withdrawable version base Circuit breaker The circuit breakers consist of a -pole switching unit (fixedmounted or withdrawable version) and a trip unit, which is available with a choice of different characteristics. Switch disconnector The switch disconnector consists of a switching unit (fixedmounted or withdrawable version) and a switch disconnector unit. Selection and ordering data Switching units Rated Current Short-circuit breaking DT Order No. PS* Weight I n capacity I cu at AC 4 V approx. A ka kg Fixed-mounted version, -pole 6 B VT 76-AA-AA unit. Withdrawable version, -pole 6 B VT 76-AA8-AA unit. For different versions of connection, it is necessary to use connecting sets (see page /6). * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /

212 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Selection and ordering data for accessories Siemens AG Rated current I n Overload protection DT Order No. PS* Weight approx. A kg Electronic trip units (ETU) Distribution protection, ETU DP, LI function For protecting lines and transformers A B VT9 6-6AC unit A B VT9-6AC unit.... A B VT9-6AC unit A B VT9 6-6AC unit.9 Motor/generator protection, ETU MP, LI function Provides protection for motors and generators Suitable also for protecting lines and transformers A B VT9 6-6AP unit A B VT9-6AP unit.9... A B VT9-6AP unit A B VT9 6-6AP unit. Universal protection, ETU UP LSI function Provides protection for complicated loads or loads not specified in advance A B VT9 6-6AD unit A B VT9-6AD unit.9... A B VT9-6AD unit A B VT9 6-6AD unit.9 Switch disconnector unit 6 Switch disconnector unit B VT9 6-6DT unit.4 Signalling unit Signalling unit for trip units ETU DP, MP and UP B VT9-6AE unit.67 S Rated control supply voltage U s DT Order No. PS* Weight approx. kg Auxiliary switches AC/DC 6... V/DC V B VT9 -AF unit.4 AC/DC... 6 V B VT9 -AF unit.4 Shunt trip units AC/DC 4 V B VT9 -SF unit.99 AC/DC 48 V B VT9 -SG unit. AC/DC V B VT9 -SH unit. AC V/DC V B VT9 -SJ unit. AC/DC 4 V B VT9 -SK unit. AC/DC V B VT9 -SL unit. Undervoltage trip units AC/DC 4 V B VT9 -UF unit. AC/DC 48 V B VT9 -UG unit. AC/DC V B VT9 -UH unit. AC V/DC V B VT9 -UJ unit. AC/DC 4 V B VT9 -UK unit. AC/DC V B VT9 -UL unit. /4 Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

213 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Manual/motorized operating mechanisms Overview Rotary operating mechanism The rotary operating mechanism assembly consists of: VT9 -HA rotary operating mechanism VT9 -HE/HF hand drive lever In order to operate the circuit breaker through the switchgear cabinet door the following components are additionally needed: VT9 -HJ extension shaft VT9 -HG/HG coupling driver Selection and ordering data Version DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg Rotary operating mechanism Rotary operating mechanism (hand drive unit) lockable with padlock B VT9 -HA unit. Hand drive lever lockable with padlock black B VT9 -HE unit.6 lockable with padlock red B VT9 -HF unit.6 Coupling driver Degree of protection IP44 B VT9 -HG unit.6 Degree of protection IP66 B VT9 -HG unit.4 Extension shaft length 6 mm B VT9 -HJ unit. Mechanical Interlocks Mechanical interlocks for the rotary operating mechanism B VT9-8LA unit. for circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version Both circuit breakers must be equipped with a rotary operating mechanism and a knob. Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire is intended for fixed-mounted and withdrawable versions. For circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version B VT9-8LC unit.4 For one fixed-mounted and one withdrawable circuit breaker/switch disconnector B VT9-8LC unit.4 For circuit breaker/switch disconnector, withdrawable version B VT9-8LC4 unit. Motorized operating mechanism Motorized operating mechanism; Rated control voltage AC/DC V B VT9 -MN unit 4, AC V/DC V B VT9 -MQ unit 4,44 Motorized operating mechanism with operations counter; Rated control voltage AC/DC V B VT9 -MN unit 4,4 AC V/DC V B VT9 -MQ unit 4,4 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /

214 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Mounting accessories Siemens AG Overview Withdrawable version When connecting the main circuit, the recommendations on page / as well as the deionizing space (see page /4) must be observed The withdrawable version base must be fitted with: - VT 76-AA8-AA switching unit, -pole version; - x VT9-4EF connection set (front connection) or VT9-4RD (rear connection) We recommend attaching the withdrawable version base to the switchboard with: - VT9-4SA4 mounting bolt set (4 x M8 x6) Selection and ordering data Version Max. permissible cross-section S mm Withdrawable version base Withdrawable version base for -pole circuit breaker/switch disconnector Type of cables DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg B VT9-4WA unit, Connecting sets Box terminals, double x Cu/Al cables B VT9 4-4TG unit.47 For connecting four mm cables, it is possible to use two VT9 4-4TG connecting sets (see page /). Not for VT4 7-AA-AA switching unit. Box terminals, Cu/Al cables B VT9 4-4TF unit.66 For connecting three mm cables, it is possible to combine the VT9 4-4TG connecting set with the VT9 4-4TF connecting set (see page /). Not for VT4 7-AA-AA switching unit. Rear connection Busbars Up to A B VT9 4-4RC unit.4 Up to 6 A B VT9-4RC unit.678 Front connection for withdrawable version Busbars B VT9-4EF unit.7 Rear connection for withdrawable version Busbars B VT9-4RD unit,4 Terminals for circular conductors... Cu/Al cables for cables B VT9-4TF unit. for cables B VT9-4TF unit.948 for 4 cables B VT9 4-4TF unit.88 /6 Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

215 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Catalog - Accessories and Components Further accessories Selection and ordering data Accessories Version DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU approx. kg Insulating barriers In case of reversed connection (supply to terminals, 4, 6), the insulating barriers must also be installed on the bottom side. Not included in standard scope of delivery of switching units in fixedmounted version. For switching unit, fixed-mounted version B VT9-8CE unit.64 For withdrawable version B VT9-8CF unit.4 Terminal cover protection Increases degree of protection of connection point to IP. Intended for withdrawable version with front connection. We recommend installation of terminal cover protection on both sides of the withdrawable device for increasing safety when maintaining the electrical device. For circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version with rear connection B VT9-8CD unit.87 For withdrawable version with front connection B VT9-8CC unit.68 Insulating grommets Intended for fixed-mounted version of switching unit and withdrawable version with rear connection. The insulating connecting sets insulate connecting sets of rear connection from switchgear structure. We recommend installation on all connecting sets with rear connection. For rear connection B VT9-8CG unit. Locking device for knob B VT9 -HL unit.4 Enables locking circuit breaker in switched off manually position. For locking, up to three padlocks with a max. shank diameter of 6 mm may be used Bolt sealing insert B VT9-8BN unit. Provides sealing for: Accessory compartment cover Connecting cable B VT9-4PL unit. For connecting circuit breaker accessories to withdrawable version ( wire) Position indicator B VT9-4WL unit. Signals circuit breaker/switch disconnector position in withdrawable version Mounting bolts B VT9-4SA4 unit.44 For withdrawable version ON button cover B VT9 -MF unit.9 For motorized operating mechanism, cover can be sealed with sealing wire * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Siemens LV 6 /7

216 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Technical specifications Siemens AG Type VT circuit breakers Switch disconnector Order number VT 76-AA-AA VT9 6-6DT VT 76-AA8-AA Standards EN , IEC 947- EN , IEC 947- Approval marks Number of poles Rated current I n A 6,,, 6 -- Rated normal current I u A 6 Rated operational current I e A -- 6 Rated operational voltage U e V AC max. 69 AC max. 69 DC max. 44 Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 8 Rated insulation voltage U i V 69 Utilization category (selectivity) AC 69 V A, B -- Utilization category (switching mode) AC 69 V DC 44 V AC- B DC- B Rated short-time withstand current U e = AC 69 V I cw /t ka/ s Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (rms value) ) I cu available, -- unavailable 8 ka/ac V ka/ac 4 V 4 ka/ac 4 V ka/ac 69 V Off-time at I cu ms -- Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (rms value) I cs /U e 4 ka/ac V 6 ka/ac 4 V ka/ac V ka/ac 69 V -- Rated short-circuit making capacity (peak value) I cm /U e 4 ka/ac 4 V 4 ka/ac 4 V 4 ka/ac 44 V Losses per pole at I n = 6 A W Mechanical endurance cycles Electrical endurance (U e = AC 4 V ) 4 Switching frequency cycles/hr Operating force N Front-side device protection IP4 Terminal protection IP Operating conditions Reference ambient temperature C 4 Ambient temperature range Working environment dry and tropical climate Degree of pollution Max. elevation m Seismic resistance m/s g at 8... Hz Design modifications Front/rear connection / Plug-in version -- Withdrawable version Accessories Switches-auxiliary/relative/signal/leading Shunt trip unit Undervoltage trip unit Front rotary operating mechanism Mechanical interlocking to the rotary operating mechanism by Bowden wire Motorized operating mechanism/with operations counter Locking-type lever Bolt sealing insert/additional cover for trip unit / /--/-- / /-- ) If the circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals, 4, 6, output terminals,, ), I cu does not change. -- /8 Siemens LV 6

217 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Schematics Circuit breaker with accessories Recommended wiring of the control circuits L+ Q ON Withdrawable device 4 (7) SO (8) Connecting cable X B OFF Motor drive X 7 NC NO S C 4 Auxiliary trips A VT9 -U. B VT9 -S. or M P U< U V TEST Main circuit VT9-6AE I> I> Q T T T Switches auxiliary auxiliary relative relative....4 VT9 -AF....4 VT9 -AF....4 VT9 -AF VT9 -AF MP 6 X 6 N- 9 J A B acc.c. no acc.c. no. acc.c. no. acc.c. no. acc.c. 4 SO VT9-4WA4 4 4 Withdrawable device 6 X Connecting cable NSO_84 MP VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism M Motor P Energy storage device X Connector to connect control circuits SSI Switch signalling MANUAL (NO-C)/AUTO (NC-C) modes B Recommended wiring of the control circuits ON Pushbutton OFF Pushbutton Q Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism J VT4 7-AA-AA, VT 76-AA-AA switching unit Q Main contacts T, T, T, Current transformers V Trip-free mechanism ETU Trip unit, ETU DP, MP and UP TEST Pushbutton to test tripping ZV-BL VT9-4WA4 withdrawable version X, X VT9-4PL connecting cable for withdrawable version SO, SO Contacts indicating positions of VT9-4WL (see page /7) withdrawable versions, see page /4. VT9 -U.. Undervoltage trip units VT9 -S.. Shunt trip units Siemens LV 6 /9

218 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Functions Switching states in the circuit breaker cavities Accessory compartment,, 4 Circuit breaker position Lever position of circuit breaker State of the main contacts Switched on VT9 -AF Siemens AG VT9 -AF Switched off manually or electrically by operating mechanism Switched off by the trip unit, auxiliary trip unit or by TEST pushbutton = contact open = contact closed Design Main circuit Connected with Cu/Al busbars or cables, and possibly cables with cable lugs. Connecting sets are available for greater connecting options, (see page /6). Generally, conductors from the power supply are connected to input terminals,,, (N) and conductors from the load to terminals, 4, 6, (N). But it is possible to exchange this connection (switching of input and output terminals) without limiting rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity I cu. In case of reversed connection, the circuit breaker/switch disconnector must be provided with VT9-8CE insulating barriers also between terminals, 4, 6 (for detailed information, see page /4). We recommend painting the connecting busbars. Input and output conductors/busbars must be mechanically reinforced to avoid transmitting electrodynamic force to the circuit breaker/switch disconnector during short-circuiting. The power circuit must be connected in such a way that the deionizing space of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is not obstructed (see page /4). Auxiliary circuits Switches, shunt trip units or undervoltage trip units are connected using flexible.... mm Cu conductors to the terminals on these devices. Auxiliary circuits of the withdrawable version are connected using a connector. Recommended cross-sections for cables, busbars and flexibars for fixed-mounted and withdrawable versions Rated current I n Permissible crosssection S Busbars W x H Cu AI Cu Al A mm mm mm mm x x8 6 x 8 x4 8 x 4 x4 x x x xx8 x 4 x4 xx6 x 4 4x4 xx (4) ) 4 x 4 xx 6 (4) ) xx ) ) The withdrawable version connected by x x mm Cu busbars can be loaded with max. 4 A. For 6 A loading, the withdrawable version must be connected by x x mm busbars. Maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads in accordance with ambient temperature VT4 circuit breaker/switch disconnector - connection of Cu busbars x x 6 mm to pole C C 6 C 6 C 7 C A A A A 98 A VT circuit breaker/switch disconnector - connection of Cu busbars x x 6 mm to pole C C 6 C 6 C 7 C 4 A 4 A 4 A 6 A A VT circuit breaker/switch disconnector - connection of Cu busbars x x mm to pole C C 6 C 6 C 7 C 6 A 4 A 46 A 4 A A / Siemens LV 6

219 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Specifications of cable shapes Order No. of connecting set Max. rated current I Maximum permissible conductor cross-section S Cable type Sector-shaped conductor, stranded Sector-shaped conductor, solid Round conductor, stranded Round conductor, solid Busbars and cable lugs Technical information W x H A mm mm VT9 4-4TG 8 x (7... 4) Cu/Al x (9... ) Cu/Al x (... 8) Cu/Al x (7... 4) Cu/Al /6, /6 VT9 4-4TF Cu/Al 9... Cu/Al... 8 Cu/Al Cu/Al /6, /6 VT9-4TF x (... ) Cu/Al x (... ) Cu/Al x (... ) Cu/Al x (... ) Cu/Al /7, /7 VT9-4TF x (... ) Cu/Al x (... ) Cu/Al x (... ) Cu/Al x (... ) Cu/Al /7, /7 VT9 4-4TF 6 4 x (... ) Cu/Al 4 x (... ) Cu/Al 4 x (... ) Cu/Al 4 x (... ) Cu/Al /8, /8 VT9 4-4RC x... / VT9-4RC 6 x... /, / VT9-4EF 6 x... /4 VT9-4RD 6 x Siemens LV 6 /

220 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Withdrawable version Siemens AG Overview The withdrawable version of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid exchange of the circuit breaker and frequent checking of the circuit are needed. The withdrawable version base must be fitted with the following connecting sets: x VT9-4EF, for front connection or x VT9-4RD, for rear connection For mounting withdrawable device to switchgear, use VT9-4SA4 installation bolts, see page /7. Circuit breaker position The withdrawable version of the circuit breaker has three positions:. inserted (connected position). withdrawn (disconnected position). removed Main circuit To connect busbars and cable lugs, use VT9-4EF connection set (front connection) or VT9-4RD (rear connection). For connection using cables, it is necessary to additionally use VT9-4EF or VT9-4RD connection sets. The way of connecting the main circuit must observe recommendations (see page /) as well as deionizing space (see page /4). Auxiliary circuits These are connected using VT9-4PL -wire cables. Circuit breaker accessories for withdrawable version The withdrawable version of the circuit breaker has the same accessories as the fixed-mounted version. VT9-4WC specifications Order Number VT9-4WL Rated operating voltage U e AC V Rated frequency f n /6 Hz Rated operating current 6A/ACV I e /U e Arrangement of contacts Connector cross-section S.... mm Terminal protection (connected switch) IP For the wiring diagram of the circuit breaker in withdrawable device with accessories, see page /9. VT9-4WL position signalling The withdrawable device can be provided with up to four switches for signalling the circuit breaker s switched-on position (see table). Advantages and enhanced safety for operator: Remote signalling of circuit breaker s switched-on position (position of locking is not signalled) Checking of circuit breaker and accessories function in the checking position Locking of withdrawable device against inserting circuit breaker, locking of circuit breaker in withdrawn (checking) position - locking by means of padlocks. Visible and conductive disconnection of the power circuit Easy exchange of circuit breakers in case of failure States of switches VT9-4WL in withdrawable device according to circuit breaker and lockout positions Circuit breaker position State of switch 4 4 Switched on (locked or not locked) Other positions = contact open = contact closed / Siemens LV 6

221 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Withdrawable version Recommended wiring of circuit breaker, withdrawable version with motorized operating mechanism L+ B Control circuit Q Motor drive X NC MP X C OFF NO SSI 6 6 N- ON M 9 P VT9 -AF Switches 4. relative acc.c. 4 NSO_4 Symbol MP M P X X4 SSI B ON OFF Q Description VT9 -M.. motorized operating mechanism Motor Energy storage device Terminal strip to connect control circuits Terminal strip for external operations counter Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) modes Recommended wiring of the control circuits (control circuits not included in motor driver delivery) Make pushbutton Break pushbutton Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism AC V LSN 4C/ AC V LSN C/ DC V LSN-DC 4C/ DC V LSN-DC C/ Inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker with motorized operating mechanism Each time before inserting or withdrawing the circuit breaker, we recommend first to turn the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the motor drive to the MANUAL position More information is available in the operating instructions Not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recommended wiring could mean that the circuit breaker will not successfully turn on at the first attempt Changes in states of switches in compartments of switching unit when inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker Circuit breaker state before insertion Circuit breaker state before withdrawal State before insertion/withdrawal State of switches before insertion -withdrawn position State of switches before withdrawal inserted position accessory compartment State after insertion/withdrawal State of switches after insertion inserted position State of switches after withdrawal withdrawn position accessory compartment,,4,,4 Lever position of circuit breaker State of the main contacts VT9 -AF 4 Switched on VT9 -AF 4 VT9 -AF 4 VT9 -AF 4 Switched off manually or by motor drive Switched off from the switched-on state: by the trip unit or TEST button Siemens LV 6 /

222 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Overview The electronic trip unit is a separate and interchangeable unit, which has to be ordered separately and in addition to the VT 76-AA.-AA switching unit. By exchanging the trip unit, the range of the circuit breaker s rated current can be easily changed. Trip units for the VT 76-AA.-AA switching unit are available in four current values I n = 6,, and 6 A. The trip units cover rated currents ranging from to 6 A. Tripping characteristics Several different trip units are available. Some have adjustable characteristics (in order to match the protected device and to achieve the required selectivity): ETU DP trip units t NSO_6 I ETU DP trip units have one type of characteristic with adjustable I r and I rm. ETU MP trip units t NSO_44 I r I r L L t r I i I i I I I ETU MP trip units have more kinds of characteristics with adjustable I r, t r and I rm. ETU UP trip units They have universal characteristics, with the greatest variability in adjustment: I r, t r, I rmv, t v and I rm. Trip units ETU DP, MP and UP - description of function Proper functioning of trip units does not depend on the waveform of the current in the main circuit. The function of the trip unit is supported by a microprocessor, which processes a sampled signal of the power circuit and recalculates it to obtain an rms value. Therefore, digital trip units are suitable for protecting circuits where the sinusoidal current is distorted by high harmonics (e.g. circuits with controlled rectifiers, power factor compensators, pulse loading, and the like). All the trip units protect a circuit against short-circuiting and overloading. Setting of selective cascading of circuit breakers is especially enabled by the ETU UP trip unit. Tripping characteristics of the trip units are independent of the ambient temperature. The trip unit is attached to the switching unit by two bolts. The translucent cover over the adjustment controls can be sealed (with sealing wire). Adjustment of the tripping characteristics for ETU DP and MP trip units The tripping characteristics of the trip units are defined by standard EN The characteristics are adjusted in two zones using latched switches located on the trip unit: L -is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal protection. I is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against ultimate short-circuit currents.. Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L The time-dependent trip unit ETU MP is adjusted with two switches, I r and t r. The first (I r ) switch adjusts the circuit breaker s rated current. The characteristic moves along the current axis. Turning the other switch (t r ) adjusts the time after which the circuit breaker will trip while passing through 7. I r. The tripping characteristic thus moves along the time axis. With the t r switch it is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics: Four characteristics are available for motor protection. Breaking times correspond to trip unit classes A,,,. By changing t r, it is possible to select the characteristics according to the required motor starting (light, medium, heavy or very heavy starting). Four characteristics are available for protecting transformers and lines. It is not possible to turn the device back on right after the timedependent trip unit has been actuated and the circuit breaker has tripped. The trip unit must be allowed to cool off (it has a thermal memory). The memory can be disabled by turning the restart switch from the normal T t position to the T position. The time-dependent trip unit remains active, and only its thermal memory is deactivated. The thermal memory should be switched off only in justified cases, and with the knowledge that the temperature could rise in the protected device, causing repeated tripping.. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit (short-circuit trip unit) I The time-independent instantaneous ETU DP and ETU MP trip units are adjusted with one switch, I rm. The I rm switch sets the short-circuit current that, when reached or exceeded, causes instantaneous tripping of the circuit breaker. Regulation of the short-circuit trip unit provides settings for the characteristic appropriate for protecting lines and motors. The wave form of the tripping characteristic is adjusted with latched switches located on the trip unit s front panel according to the needs of the protected device. A visual demonstration on setting the tripping characteristics is available in the SIMARIS design software (Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution). /4 Siemens LV 6

223 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Tripping characteristics of ETU DP and MP trip units with load The tripping characteristics from the cold state indicate the tripping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the circuit breaker. The tripping characteristic tripped from warm state indicates the tripping times during which it is assumed that, before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic trip units are independent of the ambient temperature and are plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of tripping in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a steady state, as shown in the following diagram. The steady state is a period during which the characteristic does not change. If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least minutes, the tripping times will be cut by a half. If the load is less than 7% of I r, the tripping time does not become shorter. k [-] NSO_4 T ETU DP and MP tripping times shortening with load T - When tripping from the trip unit s warm state, the tripping time of the characteristic is cut short during the standstill time t u by coefficient k. Thermal standstill time of the characteristics For all kinds of characteristics t r the thermal standstill time for ETU DP and MP trip units is t u min. During this time, the short-circuit tripping time t v is cut short from the cold-state characteristic by the coefficient k. The real tripping time is t s = k. t v Example: The shortening constant can be read from the graph. With steady current 8% of I r the real tripping time will be shortened to: t s =.74. t v k [ ] time shortening coefficient I r [A] adjusted rated current of the trip unit t v [s] tripping time of the trip unit derived from the characteristic t s [s] real tripping time of the trip unit tripped from warm state t u [s] standstill period for particular characteristics Trip units are set by the manufacturer I r = min Restart = T (t) I rm = min t r = TV, min I r [%] ^ Siemens LV 6 /

224 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Siemens AG Tripping characteristic adjustment, trip unit ETU UP t NSO_46 I r L S I t r I sd I t OFF I t ON t sd I i The tripping characteristic of trip unit is defined by standard EN The characteristic is adjusted in three zones using latched switches located on the trip unit: L - is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal protection. S - is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance short-circuit protection for lines. Intentional delay in tripping of these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selectivity of protective devices. This type of delay can be set only in self-contained trip units (full version). I - is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against ultimate short-circuit currents without time delay. I t - Characteristic setting in ON position represents a constant value of energy passed through. If fuses are used as protective elements for outgoing branch feeders, it is possible to adjust the selective part of the characteristics to better suit the shape of the fuse characteristics.. Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L The time-dependent trip unit ETU UP is adjusted with two switches, I r and t r. The first switch, I r, adjusts the circuit breaker s rated current. The characteristics move along the current axis. Turning the second switch, t r, adjusts the time after which the circuit breaker will trip while passing through 7. I r. The tripping characteristics thus move on the time axis. A total of 8 characteristics can be set with the t r switch. Breaking times correspond to tripping classes A,,,. It is not possible to turn the device back on right after the timedependent trip unit has tripped the circuit breaker. The trip unit must be allowed to cool off (it has a thermal memory). The memory can be disabled by turning the restart switch from the normal T t position to the T position. The time-dependent trip unit remains active, and only its thermal memory is inactivated. The thermal memory should be switched off only in justified cases, and with the knowledge that there could be rising temperature in the protected device, causing repeated tripping.. I. Delayed time-independent trip units S It is used to set up a selective cascade of circuit breakers. It is set up using specifications I sd and t sd. I sd is an n-multiple of current I r (I sd = n I r ). It is a short-circuit current that, within the span of I sd to I rm, will trip the circuit breaker with delay t sd, where t sd is a delay set up for switching off the trip unit. The delayed time-independent trip unit actuates the circuit breaker if the current in the circuit reaches at least the preset n- multiple and lasts at least the preset delay time t sd. The trip unit can be disabled by setting the parameter n (I sd = n I r ) into the position. Parameter t sd can be set to values with respect to the energy that passed through l t (switch position l t on). The preset time values are then applicable for currents higher than x current I r. Tripping times of k-multiples of I r for k < are defined as follows: t = t v k. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit I It is set up with parameter I i. I i is a short-circuit current that, when reached or exceeded, causes the circuit breaker to switch off instantaneously. It is set up directly in ka on the trip unit. The wave form of the tripping characteristic is adjusted using latched switches located on the trip unit s front panel to match the needs of the protected device. A visual demonstration on setting the tripping characteristic is available in the SIMARIS design software (Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution). /6 Siemens LV 6

225 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Tripping characteristics of ETU UP trip units with load The tripping characteristic from the cold state indicates the tripping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the circuit breaker. The tripping characteristic tripped from warm state indicates the tripping times during which it is assumed that, before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic trip units are independent of the ambient temperature and are plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of a trip unit in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a steady state, as shown in the following diagram. The steady state is a period during which the characteristic does not change. If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least minutes, the tripping times will be cut by a half. If the load is less than 7% of I r, the tripping time does not become shorter. Tripping time shortening with load Example The shortening constant can be read from the graph. With steady current 8% of I r the real tripping time will be shortened to: t s =.74. t v k [-] time shortening coefficient I r [A] adjusted rated current of trip unit t v [s] tripping time of the trip unit derived from the characteristic t s [s] real tripping time of the trip unit tripped from warm state t u [s] standstill period for particular characteristics Trip units are set by the manufacturer I r = min Restart = T (t) I i = min tr = min t sd = min, I t - ON I sd = min k [-]. NSO_ T I r [%] T - When tripping from the warm state, the tripping time of the characteristic is cut short during the standstill time t u by coefficient k. Thermal standstill time of the characteristics For all kinds of characteristics t r the thermal standstill period for ETU UP trip units is t u min. During this time, the short-circuit tripping time t v is cut short from the cold-state characteristic by the coefficient k. The real tripping time is t s = k. t v Siemens LV 6 /7

226 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Siemens AG Trip units ETU DP - Distribution protection Provides protection for lines and transformers The VT9..-6AC trip unit is intended only for VT 76- AA.-AA switching units. Operation of the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is fitted with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning the switch on the front panel from position T (t) to position T (). After having disabled the thermal memory, the thermal tripping function remains active. A practical advantage of the trip unit is a specially designed tripping characteristic that provides for optimal exploitation of transformers up to. I n. Another advantage of this trip unit is the simple adjustment of the tripping characteristic. Set-up includes only rated current and the tripping level of the short-circuit trip unit. Reaching 8% and % of I r is indicated by LED diodes on the front panel denoted as I > 8% of I r and I > % of I r. Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover are four photocells for communicating with the VT9-6AE signalling unit. Tripping characteristics t [s] min. L In=6A n = A In=A n = A In=A n = A In=6A n = A I n = 6 A I n = A I n = A. I n = 6 A.... I r max I r I i [ka] I i [ka] I i [ka] I i [ka] I NSO_48 x I n I i Adjustable specifications Order No. Rated current I n Overload Restart Instantaneous protection I r short circuit protection I i A A ka, 6.8 7, 9., VT9 6-6AC 6 4, 6 T (). 4, 4 T (t) 4. 4, 48 6, 7. 7, 6 4, 4. 4, 48, VT9-6AC 7, 6 T () 6, 68 T (t) 7 7, , 87 9,,. 77, 6 6, 68 VT9-6AC 7, 76 T () 7 8, 866 T (t) 9 99,,,, 8 6, 68 7, , 9 6 VT9 6-6AC 6, T () 8, T (t), 4 7, 44 7, 6 /8 Siemens LV 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

227 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Trip units ETU MP - Motor protection Provides protection of motors and generators Can protect lines and transformers The VT9..-6AP trip unit is intended only for VT76-AA.- AA switching unit. The operation of the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch on the front panel from position T (t) to position T (). After having disabled the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains active. A practical advantage of the trip unit is a specially designed tripping characteristic that provides for optimal exploitation of transformers up to. I n. It is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics on the trip unit. From these, in mode M, there are 4 characteristics for motor protection and another 4 characteristics in mode T V for protecting transformers and lines. The shape of each characteristic can be changed using a selector switch. When one or two phases fail, in the M-characteristic mode, the switch will open with a 4 s delay (so-called undercurrent tripping). Another parameter for adjusting the trip unit is the rated current, which is adjusted in a range of.4 to. of I n and the short-circuit tripping level. Reaching 8% and % of I r is indicated by LED diodes on the front panel denoted as I > 8% of I r and I > % of I r. Located on the lower of the trip unit cover are four photocells for communicating with the VT9-6AE signalling unit. Adjustable specifications Order No. Rated current I n Overload protection I r t t (7. x I r ) Restart Instantaneous short circuit protection I i A A S ka, 6 (TV).8 7, 9 (TV)., (TV ) VT9 6-6AP 6 4, 6 (TV ) T (). 4, 4 (M) T (t) 4. 4, 48 8(M8) 6, (M ) 7. 7, 6 (M ) 4, 4 (TV). 4, 48 (TV), (TV ) VT9-6AP 7, 6 (TV ) T () 6, 68 (M) T (t) 7 7, 76 8(M8) 9 8, 87 (M ) 9, (M ), (TV). 77, 6 (TV) 6, 68 (TV ) VT9-6AP 7, 76 (TV ) T () 7 8, 866 (M) T (t) 9 99, 8(M8),, (M ), (M ) 8 6, 68 (TV) 7, 8 (TV) 4 87, 9 (TV ) 6 VT9 6-6AP 6, (TV ) T () 8, (M) T (t), 8(M8) 4 7, 44 (M ) 7, 6 (M ) Siemens LV 6 /9

228 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Tripping characteristic ETU MP Siemens AG t [s] min. I r max. I r t r I i NSO_49 TV t [s] min. I r max. I r t r I i NSO_46 M. L I n = 6 A I n = A I n = A I n = 6 A... I n = 6 A... I n = A... I n = A... I n = 6 A t r x I n I I i [ka] I i [ka] I i [ka] I i [ka]. L I n = 6 A I n = A I n = A I n = 6 A.... I n = 6 A.. I n = A... I n = A... I n = 6 A t r x I n I i [ka] I I i [ka] I i [ka] I i [ka] / Siemens LV 6

229 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Trip units ETU UP - Universal protection For protecting complicated loads or those not specified in advance. The VT9..-6AD trip unit is intended for the VT 76-AA.- AA switching unit only. The trip unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a restart switch on the front panel from the position T (t) to position T (). After disabling the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains active. A practical advantage of the trip unit is its maximum flexibility for adjusting the tripping characteristic. With its possibility for setting I t = constant and I t = constant, it is optimal from the selectivity viewpoint for its interaction with fusing devices. Specifications for adjustable trip units Reaching 8% and % of I r is indicated by LED diodes on the front panel denoted as I > 8% of I r and I > % of I r. The bottom part of the trip unit cover contains photocells for communicating with the VT9-6AE signalling unit. Order No. Rated current I n Overload protection t r (7. x I r ) Short delayed short I r circuit protection I sd A=(nxI r ) t sd I t Restart Instantaneous short circuit protection I i A A s n ms ka, 6.,.8 7, 9, on T ()., 4, 6 VT9 6-6AD 6 4, ,. 4, 4 8, 4. 4, 48 9, off T (t) 6, 4, , 6 8, 4, 4.,. 4, 48, on T (), 4, 6 VT9-6AD 7, , 6, 68 8, 7 7, 76 9, off T (t) 9 8, 87 4, 6 9, 8,,.,. 77, 6, on T () 6, 68 4, 6 VT9-6AD 7, , 7 8, 866 8, 9 99, 9, off T (t),, 4, 6, 8, 8 6, 68., 7, 8, on T () 4 87, 9 4, 6 6 VT9 6-6AD 6, 7 7 8, 8, 8,, 9, off T (t) 4 7, 44 4, 6 7, 6 8, Siemens LV 6 /

230 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Tripping characteristic ETU UP Siemens AG t [s] min. I r max. I sd = ( ) x I r min NSO_46 I r t r I sd t v I i t [s] min. I r max. I sd = ( ) x I r min NSO_46 I r t r I sd t v I i I n = 6 A I n = A I n = A I n = 6 A I n = 6 A I n = A I n = A I n = 6 A L S t v [ms] (I t = OFF) I sd = ( ) x I r max. t r [s] I i [ka].. I i [ka] x In I i [ka] I i [ka] I I n = 6 A I n = A I n = A I n = 6 A I n = 6 A I n = A I n = A I n = 6 A L S t v [ms] (I t = ON) I sd = ( ) x I r max. t r [s]... I i [ka] I i [ka] x In I i [ka] I i [ka] I / Siemens LV 6

231 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Trip units Tripping characteristic ETU UP t [s] I n = 6 A I n = A I n = A I n = 6 A I n = 6 A I n = A I n = A min. I n = 6 A L S.. I r max. t v [ms] (I t = OFF) I sd = ( ) x I r min I i [ka]. I i [ka]. I i [ka] NSO_46 I r t r I sd t v I i I sd = ( ) x I r max I i [ka] x I n t r [s] I t [s] L I n = 6 A I n = A I n = A I n = 6 A I n = 6 A min. I n = A I n = A I n = 6 A S.. I r t v [ms] (I t = ON) max. I sd = ( ) x I r min NSO_464 I r t r I sd t v I i I sd = ( ) x I r max I i [ka] I i [ka]. I i [ka] x I n I i [ka] t r [s] I Siemens LV 6 /

232 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Signalling units Overview The VT9-6AE signalling unit is a modular accessory for the VT4 and VT circuit breakers and operates in conjunction with VT9..-6AC, VT9..-6AP and VT9..-6AD electronic trip units. It is intended for applications in automated control systems The signalling unit signals reaching a certain current value in a circuit and the tripping of the circuit breaker by trip units (time-dependent, time-independent, undercurrent) - The user has options to set up (by steps, using a rotary switch) a current value which will be indicated when reached - the options are 7; 8; 9; ; ; 4; 6 or 8% I r (refer to the table below for more details). Local indication regarding the state of the circuit breaker and the protected circuit is signaled by LED indicators located on the front panel of the signalling unit The information on the state of the circuit breaker is transferred from the trip unit to the signalling unit by means of optical coupling Remote indication on the state of the circuit breaker and the protected circuit is ensured by a relay, the make and break contacts of which are pulled into the terminal strip on the unit - relays to indicate tripping of time-dependent or undercurrent and time-independent trip units have storage - after the storage relay is activated by tripping, it is necessary to reset the relay by actuating the front panel RESET switch, or to reset remotely by an external pushbutton. The supply voltages are presented in the table The main power supply circuit and the reset circuit are not safely separated The external RESET button must be connected with a screened cable or a twisted wire with maximum loop resistance of Ohm. The signalling unit will not work without power supply! Specifications Order No. Rated operating voltage U e Protection (tube fuse) Rated frequency f n Current draw (rms) max. at U e AC- DC- AC/DC V AC/DC 4 V AC/DC 48 V AC/DC V AC V/DC V VT9-6AE AC/DC... V T. A /6 Hz 7 ma 7 ma ma 6 ma ma Rated operating current (of relay contacts) I e /U e AC- DC- Connection cross-section S.... mm 8 A/AC V. A DC V, 8 A/DC V Main circuit status indication Signalling (relay contacts) LED Reaching < 7% I r -- + % I r + + 7; 8; 9; ; ; 4; 6; Settings + + Tripping By time-dependent/undercurrent trip unit + +/+ By time-independent trip unit + + AC/DC Power - V RESET I > % I r I > % I r M ~ N < m I > I sd I > Ir NSO_46, supply 6, 7 external RESET button 9,, relay contacts indicating preset I r,, 4 relay contacts indicating reaching % I r, 6, 7 relay contacts indicating tripping by timedependent or undercurrent trip units 8, 9, relay contacts indicating tripping by independent trip unit (instantaneous or delayed tripping) /4 Siemens LV 6

233 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Auxiliary switches Technical specifications Order No. VT9 -AF VT9 -AF ) Rated operating voltage U e V AC 6... V DC V Rated isolation voltage U i V Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Rated operating current I e /U e AC- DC- AC...6 V DC...6 V 6A/6V...4V, A/4V,. A/ V A/6V,.7A/V,.A/4V Thermal current I th A 6A. A Arrangement of contacts Connection cross-section S mm.... Terminal protection (connected switch) IP ) PS-BL-...-Au is not suitable for controlling electromagnetic loads Arrangement of contacts Number of contacts Contact types + break + make Functions and names of switches according to their location in cavities Switch location Switch name Switch function accessory compartment, accessory compartment, 4 Wiring diagram Auxiliary switch Relative switch to indicate the position of the main contacts to indicate tripping of circuit breaker by trip unit, TEST pushbutton or by motor auxiliary Switches auxiliary relative relative VT9 -AF VT9 -AF VT9 -AF VT9 -AF acc.comp. no acc. comp. no. acc. comp. no. acc. comp. no. 4 NSO_466 Siemens LV 6 /

234 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Shunt trip units Technical specifications Order No. VT9 -S. L+ Rated operating voltage U e V AC 4, 48,,, 4, DC 4, 48,, Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Input power at. U e AC DC Characteristic <.VA <W U,7U e the circuit breaker must trip B U VT9 -S. Time to switch-off ms Continuous load Yes Connection cross-section S mm.... Terminal protection (connected trip units) IP N- B NSO_467 Location in accessory compartment No. Circuit breaker switched off by shunt trip unit 4 6 Main contacts Auxiliary switch NSO_ Auxiliary switch Relative switch Relative switch t [ms] accessory compartment + accessory compartment + 4 Circuit breaker states and lever positions of circuit breakers Circuit breaker state lever positions of circuit breakers Switched on Switched off by trip units, or by TEST button or by the trip pushbutton on the motor drive Switched off manually or electrically by drive /6 Siemens LV 6

235 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Undervoltage trip units Technical specifications Order No. VT9 -U. Rated operating voltage U e V AC 4, 48,,, 4, DC 4, 48,, Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Input power at. U e <.VA <W Characteristic U.8 U e, circuit breaker can switch on U. U e, the circuit breaker must trip Circuit breaker switched off by undervoltage trip unit Circuit breaker state Switched on Switched off by trip units, or by TEST button or by the trip pushbutton on the motor drive Switched off manually or electrically by drive lever positions of circuit breakers Time to switched-off ms Continuous load Connection cross-section S Terminal protection (connected trip unit) Location in accessory compartment No. Yes mm.... IP Circuit breaker switched off by undervoltage trip unit 4 6 Main contacts Auxiliary switch NSO_ Auxiliary switch Relative switch Relative switch t [ms] accessory compartment + accessory compartment + 4 L+ A U< A VT9 -U. NSO_47 N- Siemens LV 6 /7

236 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Rotary operating mechanism Siemens AG Technical specifications Rotating the hand drive lever located on the rotary operating mechanism switches circuit breakers VT4 to VT on and off, e.g. for switching electrical equipment on and off. Modular design of the drives enables easy installation on the circuit breaker after removing the accessory compartment cover from the circuit breaker. The rotary operating mechanism and its accessories must be ordered separately, see page /. The coupling driver operates the circuit breaker through the front panel or through the cabinet door, the outlet for the operating shaft features protection class IP44 or IP66 (for bearings). The hand drive lever can be furnished with an extension shaft which makes it possible to control the circuit breaker in deeper cabinets. Specifications In order to enhance safety for the operator of the electrical equipment, the coupling driver is furnished with a locking feature which prevents the cabinet from being opened when the circuit breaker is in closed position. When the circuit breaker in position "manual open", the drive handle can be locked up using the built-in cylinder type lock (FAB) and as many as three padlocks with shank diameter up to 7 mm. When the drive lever is in position "manual open", it is possible to remove the hand drive lever. The circuit breakers with rotary operating mechanism can be equipped with a mechanical interlocking system, see next page. Order Number Description Color Lockable with padlock when circuit breaker is in OFF state Protection class Switchgear door locking in circuit breaker state Switched on and off by trip unit Length mm VT9 -HA Rotary operating mechanism -- yes VT9 -HE Hand drive lever black yes VT9 -HF Hand drive lever red yes VT9 -HG Coupling driver IP44 yes -- VT9 -HG Coupling driver IP66 yes -- VT9 -HJ Extension shaft /8 Siemens LV 6

237 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching Technical specifications VT9-8LA Mechanical interlocking It provides interlocking of two circuit breakers so that they cannot be switched on simultaneously, but always only one of them. It is possible to use the locking device between two VT4 or VT circuit breakers or between VT4 and VT circuit breakers. Both circuit breakers must be furnished with a rotary operating mechanism (at least with the hand drive unit and hand drive lever), see page /. In order to use locking, it is necessary to adhere to the dimensions. NSO_47 4 4xØ NSO_47 VT9-8LC Mechanical interlocking by Bowden Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers so that they cannot both be tripped simultaneously, but only one of them at a time. Interlocking can be used between two VT4 or VT circuit breakers or between a VT4 and a VT circuit breaker. For interlocking, circuit breakers can be outfitted with a hand or motor drive. To use interlocking, it is absolutely necessary to comply with the dimensions shown below. Type of mechanical interlocking VT9-8LC VT9-8LC VT9-8LC4 Dimensions: Combination of circuit breaker/switch disconnector versions fixed-mounted - fixed-mounted fixed-mounted - withdrawable withdrawable - withdrawable Mechanical interlocking by Bowden between fixed-mounted and withdrawable VT circuit breakers R = 7 min 47 4 OK Ø. min R = ON ON NSO_474 OFF OFF or... 4 Siemens LV 6 /9

238 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Siemens AG Technical specifications The motorized operating mechanism is equipped with spring storage units. The energy stored in the springs makes it possible to switch the circuit breaker on in less than 7 ms. Releasing the spring energy and turning on the circuit breaker is ensured by a closing coil. The motorized operating mechanism can trip the circuit breaker in approx. s. This method of tripping is suitable for most technological applications. When faster circuit breaker tripping is required (e.g., because an emergency STOP button was pressed), it is possible to use the motorized mechanism in combination with an undervoltage trip unit or a shunt trip unit. The motorized operating mechanism front panel contains a selector switch for selecting the drive modes. There is also the possibility to remotely indicate the selector switch state. - The first mode is automatic remote control (selector switch in position AUTO). This is the standard position in automatic operation. - The second mode is manual control (selector switch position MANUAL). In manual mode the motorized operating mechanism does not need any voltage to perform perform opening/closing operations Remote switching on and off in position AUTO is carried out with pushbuttons that must be connected to the motorized operating mechanism connector. When the motorized operating mechanism is in MANUAL mode, the circuit breaker can be switched on using the green button on the front part of the motorized operating mechanism cover and to switch it off with the red TEST button on the trip unit. The function of the remote control ON button in MANUAL MODE is locked up, whereas the function of the remote control OFF button remains active for safety reasons. The motorized operating mechanism makes it simple to control the circuit breaker when there is a loss of control voltage. In MANUAL mode, it is possible to wind up the spring storage assembly by repeated rotation of the foldable handle. After the storage is wound up, the circuit breaker can be turned on using the green button on the front part of the insulation cover of the drive and it can be turned off using the red TEST button on the trip unit. The motorized operating mechanism, as opposed to the circuit breaker, recognizes only two fixed positions: - In the first position, the circuit breaker is ON. When the circuit breaker is tripped in AUTO mode by a trip unit, auxiliary trip devices or from a distance, the VT9 -AF switch (included in motorized operating mechanism delivery) will generate a pulse to load the spring storage mechanism automatically. If the switch is placed in accessory compartment or 4, automatic loading process will take place. - In the second fixed position the circuit breaker is switched off and the loaded motorized operating mechanism is ready to activate the circuit breaker after receiving the control pulse. The presence of the control voltage in the drive is indicated by a steadily lit green LED indicator below the drive plate. If the indicator is not lit, the position of the circuit breaker lever need not comply with the correct positions of the power contacts. The motorized operating mechanism may be furnished with an electromechanical operations counter. The motorized operating mechanism can be locked up in offstate position using the built-in cylinder type lock and using as many as three padlocks with the shank diameter max. 7 mm. Before the drive is locked up, it is necessary to turn the drive unit switch to MANUAL mode position, to withdraw the drive unit yellow lockup strip and to insert the padlock shank into the oval opening in the lockup strip. When a cylinder type lock is used, the lockup strip will stick out a little. An VT9 -MF cover can be affixed to the motorized operating mechanism s turn-on switch and then sealed. The cover prevents turning on the circuit breaker from the motorized operating mechanism panel. Specifications Order Number VT9 -M... Operational voltage U e V AC, DC, Rated frequency f n Hz /6 Control pulse length for switching on ms >... Control pulse length for switching off ms >... ) Time to switching on ms <7 Time to the accumulating of motor drive under voltage U e ACV s 4 DC V s 8 Time to switch-off U e ACV s DC V s Frequency of ON/OFF cycles cycles/ min Frequency of cycles - immediately cycles 8 one after another ON/OFF Mechanical endurance cycles Input power AC VA DC W Protection AC V; AC V LSN 4C/; LSN C/ DC V; DC V LSN-DC 4C/; LSN-DC C/ Rated operating current of the switch V 6A/AC selector AUTO / MANUAL I e /U e ) for sequence of control pulses, see page /. / Siemens LV 6

239 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Specifications Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanismelectrically by pushbutton ON Main contacts Auxiliary switch Auxiliary switch Relative switch Relative switch t [ms] NSO_8 accessory compartment + accessory compartment + 4 Circuit breaker switched off by motorized operating mechanismelectrically by pushbutton OFF Main contacts Auxiliary switch Auxiliary switch Relative switch Relative switch t [ms] NSO_9 accessory compartment + accessory compartment + 4 Wiring diagram Circuit breaker switch on and switched off by motor driver - electrically by pushbutton ON and pushbutton OFF Control circuit L+ Q ON B OFF Motor drive Switches relative X NC NO 4. VT9 -AF C SSI M P MP acc.c. 4 NSO_476 X 6 9 N- Circuit breaker states and Lever positions of circuit breakers Circuit breaker state lever positions of circuit breakers Switched on Switched off by trip unit, or by TEST button Switched off manually or electrically by drive Siemens LV 6 /

240 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Specifications Symbol MP Description VT9 -M... motorized operating mechanism Tripping of the circuit breaker with motorized operating mechanism by shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit M P X SSI B ON OFF S Q Motor Energy storage device Connector to connect auxiliary circuits Switch indicating MANUAL(NO-C)/ AUTO(NC-C) modes Recommended wiring of the control circuits (not included in delivery) Make pushbutton Break pushbutton Switch for energy storage (switched on = automatic storage, may be continuously switched on) Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism Main contacts Auxiliary switch Auxiliary switch Relative switch Relative switch t [ms] NSO_ accessory compartment + accessory compartment + 4 Circuit breaker states and lever positions of circuit breakers Circuit breaker state lever positions of circuit breakers Switched on Switched off by trip unit, or by TEST button Switched off manually or electrically by drive Wiring diagram description Symbol MP M P X SSI B ON OFF Q Description Motorized operating mechanism VT9 -M... Motor Energy storage device Connector to connect auxiliary circuits Switch indicating MANUAL(NO-C)/ AUTO(NC-C) modes Recommended wiring of the control circuits (not included in delivery) Make pushbutton Break pushbutton Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism / Siemens LV 6

241 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Motorized operating mechanism Wiring diagram Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism (electrical pushbutton ON) and switched off by shunt trip unit Control circuit L+ Q B OFF Motor drive X 7 NC C NO SSI ON 4 M 7 4 P VT9 -AF Switches relative 4.4 A Aux.rel. VT9 -U. B VT9 -S. or U< U Specifications Recommended actuating pulses Circuit breaker switched on/off by motorized operating mechanism HK PS Circuit breaker switched off by trip units or shunt/undervoltage trip units and switched on by motorized operating mechanism-s switch permanently closed HK > IMP OFF > 7 > IMP ON t [ms] 7 NSO_479 NSO_48 MP X A B acc.c. 4 acc.c. N- N- NSO_477 RS 8 R OFF > > IMP ON t [ms] Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism (electrical pushbutton ON) and switched off by undervoltage trip unit L+ B Control circuit Q Motor drive X 7 NC C OFF NO SSI ON 4 M 7 4 P VT9 -AF Switches relative 4.4 Aux. releases A VT9 -U. B VT9 -S. or U< U Circuit breaker states and lever positions of circuit breakers Circuit breaker state Switched on Switched off by trip unit, or by TEST button or by the trip pushbutton on the motor drive Switched off manually or electrically by drive Description of charts Symbol HK PS RS R OFF IMP S IMP ON IMP OFF X lever positions of circuit breakers Description main contacts auxiliary switch relative switch circuit breaker closed instantly by trip unit pulse to store up motor drive energy (generated by S switch) make pulse for motor drive break pulse for motor drive random segment of time MP A B acc.c. 4 acc.c. NSO_478 X 6 9 N- N- Siemens LV 6 /

242 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Accessories and Components Insulating barriers Siemens AG Overview B = C = 4. ON OFF A = NSO_ Withdrawable version Front connection terminals,, (upper side) If the mounting base for the withdrawable circuit breaker/switch disconnector is connected on the upper side, using clamp or block type terminals, VT9-8CF insulating barriers must always be installed. In all other cases, we recommend installing VT9-8CC insulating covers on the upper side of the circuit breaker. terminals, 4, 6 ( bottom side) If the mounting base for the withdrawable circuit breaker/switch disconnector is connected to the bottom side of the circuit breaker using clamp or block type terminals, VT9-8CF insulating barriers must always be installed. In all other cases, we recommend installing VT9-8CC insulating covers on the bottom side of the withdrawable version base. A, B, C - minimum deionizing space, free of earthed metal parts Use of insulating barriers and terminal covers with circuit breakers and switch disconnectors. Fixed-mounted version Front connection terminals,, (upper side) VT9-8CE insulating barriers must always be installed on circuit breakers/switch disconnectors. Terminals, 4, 6 (bottom side) - If circuit breakers/switch disconnectors are connected to the supply using terminals, 4, 6, VT9-8CE insulating barriers must always be installed on it. - If circuit breakers/switch disconnectors are connected on the bottom side using clamp or block type terminals, VT9-8CE insulating barriers must always be installed on it. Rear connection terminals,, (upper side) VT9-8CD insulating covers or VT9-8CE insulating barriers must always be installed on the circuit breaker/switch disconnector. We recommend installing VT9-8CG insulating grommets with all sets for rear connection. terminals, 4, 6 (bottom side) If circuit breakers/switch disconnectors are connected to the bottom side using clamp or block type terminals, VT9-8CD insulating barriers must always be installed on circuit breaker. We recommend installing VT9-8CG insulating grommets with all sets for rear connection. /4 Siemens LV 6

243 Dimensional drawings - fixed-mounted version Fixed-mounted version, front connection Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings VT4 VT 4 x M ON OFF NSO_9 4 x Ø Drilling pattern NSO_97 4 x Ø Fixed-mounted version, rear connection (VT9-4RC, VT9 4-4RC connecting sets) Openings for insulation grommets ON OFF 46 BLS 8 BL6S 6 6 NSO_ R4 8 Siemens LV 6 /

244 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Fixed-mounted version, clamp type terminals (VT9 4-4TG connecting sets) - not for VT4 7-AA-AA switching unit 4. ON 67 NSO_ 7 OFF 8. 8 Fixed-mounted version, clamp type terminals (VT9 4-4TG and VT9 4-4TF connecting sets) - not for VT4 7-AA-AA switching units 4. ON 67 NSO_4 7 OFF /6 Siemens LV 6

245 Fixed-mounted version, block type terminals (VT9-4TF) Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings. 4.. NSO_4 TEST ON OFF Ø 6 7. Fixed-mounted version, block type terminals (VT9-4TF). NSO_4 4.. TEST ON OFF Ø 6 Ø 6 7. Siemens LV 6 /7

246 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Fixed-mounted version, block type terminals (VT9 4-4TF) Siemens AG NSO_47 TEST ON OFF Ø 6 Ø 6 7. Fixed-mounted version, front rotary operating mechanism Knob - lockable (VT9 -HE, VT9 -HF) 46 8 NSO_ R VT9 -HA VT9 -H. /8 Siemens LV 6

247 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Fixed-mounted version, front rotary operating mechanism Cabinet door cut-out 46 9 NSO_4 4 min Ø 4 4 x Ø.4 8 VT4/VT VT9 -HA VT9 -HJ 4 VT9 -HG. VT9 -H. 6 Control cabinet door Hinge of control cabinet door min. 67 max. 6 VT9-8LA mechanical interlock Cabinet door cut-out NSO_4 4 x Ø 9 4 min x Ø x Ø.4 Hinge of control cabinet door Fixed-mounted version, motorized operating mechanism VT9 -M.., lockable with up to three padlocks R88 NSO_ Siemens LV 6 /9

248 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Fixed-mounted version, VT9-6AE signalling unit Description see page /4. Siemens AG ON OFF 47 NSO_4 4, /4 Siemens LV 6

249 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Dimensional drawings - withdrawable version VT9-4WA4 withdrawable version base Drilling pattern max. 4 4 x Ø 9 NSO_4 4 x Ø Withdrawable version, front connection (VT9-4EF connecting sets) x M NSO_ Siemens LV 6 /4

250 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Siemens AG Withdrawable version, rear connection (VT9-4RC connecting set) Drilling pattern 6. 6 max. 4 4 x Ø 9 NSO_4 4 Withdrawable version, clamp type terminals (VT9 4-4TG connecting set) NSO_4 8 /4 Siemens LV 6

251 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Withdrawable version, clamp type terminals (VT9 4-4TG and VT9 4-4TF connecting set) Siemens AG Dimensional drawings 8. NSO_ Withdrawable version, block type terminals (VT9-4TF) NSO_ Ø 6 Siemens LV 6 /4

252 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Dimensional drawings Withdrawable version, block type terminals (VT9-4TF) Siemens AG NSO_49 6 Ø 6 Ø 6 Withdrawable version, block type terminals (VT9 4-4TF) NSO_ Ø 6 Ø 6 /44 Siemens LV 6

253 Siemens AG VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Withdrawable version Connected Disconnected Dimensional drawings ON 8 OFF 8 7 NSO_ Withdrawable version, Connected Disconnected rotary operating mechanism 66 NSO_ Withdrawable version, Connected Disconnected VT9 -MQ motorized operating mechanism NSO_ Siemens LV 6 /4

254 VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 6 A Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance Notes Notes Siemens AG /46 Siemens LV 6

255 Appendix Siemens AG 6 6/ Glossary 6/ Catalog notes 6/4 Ordering notes 6/6 Further documentation 6/7 Standards and approvals 6/ Siemens contacts 6/ Solution partners 6/ Online services 6/ Service & support 6/4 Comprehensive support from A to Z 6/ Software licenses 6/6 Subject index 6/7 Order number index 6/ Terms and conditions of sale and delivery Siemens LV 6

256 Appendix Siemens AG Glossary 6 Rated operating voltage, (U e ) EN 6947-; 4... Rated insulation voltage, (U i ) EN 6947-; 4... Rated current, (I n ) EN 6947-; 4... Reduced rated current, (I r ) Tripping time at a given I r multiple, (t r ) Actuating current of (selective) release s time-independent delay, (I ds ) Delay of time-independent delayed release, (t v ) Actuating current of time-independent instantaneous, (I rm ) Rated operating current, (I e ) EN 6947-; 4... Rated normal current, (I u ) EN 6947-; Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, (I cu ) EN 6947-;..; 4... Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity, (I cs ) EN 6947-;..; 4... Rated short-time withstand current, (I cw ) EN 6947-; EN 6947-; EN 6947-; Voltage fixed by the manufacturer. Several pertinent tests relate to its determination, as may also the utilization category. Along with the rated (operating) current, it determines the device s utilization. The highest value of rated operating voltage may in no case be greater than the value of the rate insulation voltage U i. Voltage measure to which are related tests of dielectric strength and creepage distance. Current value of particular circuit breaker that can be handled uninterruptedly. The highest current valued tripping the circuit breaker in conformity with a specifically stated tripping characteristic. Specifically established, reduced value of I n current for a regulated time-dependent (thermal) trip unit and that the circuit breaker can handle continuously. Maximum setting is at value equal to I n. Changing I r shifts the trip unit s tripping characteristic along the current axis. (I r = k x I n holds where k ) Time after which circuit breaker will trip, if a current flows through it that is equal to the given multiple of I r. Changing t r shifts the tripping characteristic along the time axis. Minimum current value causing the release s time-independent delay to actuate. If a current flows through the circuit breaker equal to at least I sd but not reaching I rm the circuit breaker will trip with time delay t v. Total shut-off time is influenced by the tripping of the circuit breaker itself and is about ms longer. Minimum current value causing the time-independent instantaneous release to actuate. Rated operating current of device (switch-disconnector) is fixed by the manufacturer with consideration for the rated operating voltage, rated frequency, rated operation, utilization category and type of protective cover, if that comes into consideration. Current value set by the manufacturer and which the device can handle in continuous operation, i.e. during a period longer than 8 hours (weeks, months, or longer). Ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity value expressed as the rms value of the alternating component of the assumed short-circuit current that the circuit breaker must be able to manage in the mode: x switching off of the short circuit and a following x make-break sequence. After testing, the circuit breaker need not be able to conduct the rated current uninterruptedly. I cu is set for the rated operating voltage at the rated frequency and at the established power factor for alternating current or at the time constant for direct current. Must fulfil the condition: I cu I k Value of the operating short-circuit breaking capacity expressed as the rms value of the alternating component of the assumed short-circuit current that the circuit breaker must be able to manage in the mode: x switching off of the short circuit and a following x make-break sequence. May also be expressed as a percentage of I cu. After testing, the circuit breaker must be able uninterruptedly to conduct the rated current and to switch off the overcurrent. Temperature increase of the main terminals may be greater. I cs is set for the rated operating voltage at the rated frequency and at the established power factor for alternating current or at the time constant for direct current. Permitted: I cs I k Value of short-time withstand current specified by the manufacturer that the device is able to handle without damage during a designated time period (short-time delay). In case of alternating current, it is the rms value of the alternating component of the assumed short-circuit current I p. 6/ Siemens LV 6

257 Siemens AG Appendix Catalog notes Overview Trademarks All product designations may be registered trademarks or product names of Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their own purposes may violate the rights of the owner. Amendments All technical data, dimensions and weights are subject to change without notice unless otherwise specified on the pages of this catalog. Dimensions All dimensions are in mm. Images The illustrations are not binding. Technical data The technical data in the catalog are for general information. The instruction manuals and the operating instructions on the products must be observed during assembly, operation and maintenance. Further technical information is available at under Product List: - Technical specifications under Entry List: - Updates - Download -FAQ - Manuals - Characteristics - Certificates Configurators can be found under Assembly, operation and maintenance The instruction manuals and the operating instructions on the products must be observed during assembly, operation and maintenance. 6 Siemens LV 6 6/

258 Appendix Siemens AG 6 Ordering notes Logistics General With regard to delivery service, communications and environmental protection, our logistics service ensures "quality from the moment of ordering right through to delivery". By designing our infrastructure according to customer requirements and implementing electronic order processing, we have successfully optimized our logistics processes. We are proud of our personal consulting service, on-time deliveries and -day transport within Germany. To this end, we supply the preferred types marked with } ex works. We regard the DIN ISO 9 certification and consistent quality checks as an integral part of our services. Electronic order processing is fast, cost-efficient and error-free. Please contact us if you want to benefit from these advantages. Packaging, packing units The packaging in which our equipment is dispatched provides protection against dust and mechanical damage during transport, thus ensuring that all our products arrive in perfect condition. We select our packaging for maximum environmental compatibility and reusability (e.g. crumpled paper instead of polystyrene chips for protection during transport in packages up to kg) and, in particular, with a view to reducing waste. With our multi-unit packaging and reusable packaging, we offer you specific types of packaging that are both kind to the environment and tailored to your requirements: Your advantages at a glance: Lower order costs. Cost savings through uniform-type packaging: low/no disposal costs. Reduced time and cost thanks to short unpacking times. "Just-in-time" delivery directly to the production line helps reduce stock: cost savings through reduction of storage area. Fast assembly thanks to supply in sets. Standard Euro boxes - corresponding to the Euro pallet modular system - suitable for most conveyor systems. Active contribution to environmental protection. Unless stated otherwise in the "Selection and ordering data" of this catalog, our products are supplied individually packed. For small parts/accessories, we offer you economical packaging units as standard packs containing more than one item, e.g.,, or units. It is essential that whole number multiples of these quantities be ordered to ensure satisfactory quality of the products and problem-free order processing. The products are delivered in a neutral carton. The label includes warning notices, the CE mark, the open arrow recycling symbol, and product description information in English and German. In addition to the Order No. (MLFB) and the number of items in the packaging, the Instr. Order No. is also specified for the operating instructions. It can be obtained from your local Siemens representative (you will find a list of your local Siemens representatives at The device Order No. of most devices can also be acquired through the EAN barcode to simplify ordering and storage logistics. The Order Nos. and EAN codes are assigned electronically in the master data of the products for low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation. Ordering very small quantities When small orders are placed, the costs associated with order processing are greater than the order value. We therefore recommend that you combine several small orders. Where this is not possible, we regret that we are obliged to make a small processing charge: for orders with a net goods value of less than we charge an supplement to cover our order processing and invoicing costs. 6/4 Siemens LV 6

259 Siemens AG Appendix Ordering notes Overview Explanations on the Selection and Ordering Data Delivery time class (DT) Preferred types are device types that can be delivered immediately ex works, i.e. they are dispatched DT } A B C D X Meaning Preferred type Two workdays One week Three weeks Six weeks On request within 4 hours. Normal quantities of the products are usually delivered within the specified time following receipt of your order at our branch. In exceptional cases, the actual delivery time may differ from that specified. The delivery times apply up to the ramp at Siemens AG (products ready for dispatch). The transport times depend on the destination and type of shipping. The standard shipping time for Germany is one day. The delivery time classes specified here represent the state at /. They are permanently optimized. Up-to-date information can be found at Price units (PU) The price unit defines the number of units, sets or meters to which the specified price and weight apply. PS (packaging size) The packaging size / packaging unit defines the number, e.g. of units, sets or meters, for outer packaging. The first digit in the PS/P. unit column (packaging size/packaging unit) indicates the minimum order quantity. You can only order this specified quantity or a multiple thereof. The second digit in the PS/P. unit column (packaging size/packaging unit) specifies the number of units contained in larger packaging (e.g. in a carton). You must order this quantity or a multiple thereof if you want the item to be delivered in a larger packaging quantity. Examples: PS/P. unit Meaning unit You can order one item or a multiple thereof. units For example, five units are packed in a bag. Because the bags cannot be opened, you can only order a multiple of the quantity contained in the bag:,,, etc. / units One carton contains (for example) bags, each containing units, i.e. a total of units. If only cartons are available for delivery, you need to order a multiple of the carton quantity:,,, etc. Ordering a quantity of units, would produce the following delivery: two cartons, each containing units (= units) and 4 bags, each containing units (= units). Weight Examples The defined weight is the net weight in kg and refers to the price unit (PU). DT Order No. PS Weight per PU approx. kg B VT 7-AA6-AA unit,84 B VT 7-AA6-AA unit,84 DT Order No. PS Weight per PU approx. kg B VT9-8CE unit,77 B VT9-8CE unit, DT: B = one week DT: B = one week PS: The minimum order quantity is one unit PS: The minimum order quantity is one unit 6 Siemens LV 6 6/

260 Appendix Siemens AG Further documentation Overview We regard product support as just as important as the products and systems themselves. Visit our site on the Internet for a comprehensive offering of support for low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation products, such as Operating instructions and manuals for direct download Online registration for seminars and events Up-to-date answers to your queries and problems Software upgrades and updates for fast download Telephone assistance in more than 9 countries Photos and graphics for external use and much, much more - all conveniently and easily accessible. Address: You will find regularly updated information material such as catalogs, customer magazines, brochures and trial versions of software for low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation on the Internet at: Here you can order your copy of the available documentation or download it in common file formats (PDF, ZIP). 6 For your configuration systems we can provide technical and graphic data in electronic form for the range of low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation products: CAx online generator For the further processing of low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation products in CAE/CAD systems the online generator provides: Technical product master data in CSV and Excel format Graphic product data - D dimensional drawings in DXF format (other formats optional) - D models in STEP format - Internal circuit diagrams - EPLAN electric P 8 macros Documentation in the form of PDF files - Product data sheets - Manuals - Operating instructions - Characteristics - Certificates Product photos Texts for tenders in GAEB and Text format 6/6 Siemens LV 6

261 Siemens AG Appendix Standards and approvals Overview Approvals, test certificates, characteristic curves An overview of the certificates available for low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation products along with more technical documentation can be consulted daily on the Internet at: Product support: Approvals / Certificates Product standards (excerpt) Product support: Characteristic curves IEC EN DIN VDE Title Low-voltage controlgear and switchgear: General rules Circuit breakers Switches, disconnectors, switch disconnectors and fuse-combination units Contactors and motor starters Electromechanical contactors and motor starters Contactors and motor starters Semiconductor motor controllers and starters, soft starters Contactors and motor starters AC semiconductor controllers and contactors for non-motor loads Control circuit devices and switching elements Electromechanical control circuit devices Control circuit devices and switching elements Proximity switches Control circuit devices and switching elements Requirements for proximity devices with defined behaviour under fault conditions Control circuit devices and switching elements Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical latching function Control circuit devices and switching elements DC interface for proximity sensors and switching amplifiers (NAMUR) Control circuit devices and switching elements Requirements for proximity switches with analog output Control circuit devices and switching elements Three-position enabling switches Control circuit devices and switching elements Flow rate switches Multiple function equipment Transfer switching equipment Multiple function equipment Control and protective switching devices (or equipment) (CPS) Ancillary equipment Terminal blocks for copper conductors Ancillary equipment Protective conductor terminal blocks for copper conductors Ancillary equipment Safety requirements for fuse terminal blocks Control units for built-in thermal protection (PTC) for rotating electrical machines Controller and device interface systems. Actuator-Sensor Interface (AS-i) Low-voltage fuses General requirements Low-voltage fuses Supplementary requirements for fuse-links for the protection of semiconductor devices International Electrotechnical Vocabulary. Switchgear, controlgear and fuses Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies Type-tested and partially type-tested assemblies Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies General rules Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies Particular requirements for busbar trunking systems (busways) Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies Protection against electric shock - Protection against unintentional direct contact with hazardous live parts Protection against electric shock - Common aspects for installation and equipment Insulation coordination for electrical equipment within low-voltage systems Principles, requirements and tests 6 Siemens LV 6 6/7

262 Appendix Siemens AG Standards and approvals IEC EN DIN VDE Title Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines General requirements Electronic equipment for use in power installations Explosive atmospheres Part 4: Electrical installations design, selection and erection Installing electrical apparatus in potentially explosive gas atmospheres (except mining) Explosive atmospheres Part : Equipment protection by pressurized enclosures "p" Electromechanical elementary relays Part : General requirements Specified time relays for industrial use Part : Requirements and tests Connecting devices Electrical copper conductors Safety requirements for screw-type and screwlesstype clamping units Part : General requirements and particular requirements for clamping units for conductors from. mm to mm ) Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products - Part : General requirements and tests ) - Part -: Particular requirements and tests for separating transformers and power supplies incorporating separating transformers for general applications ) - Part -: Particular requirements and tests for control transformers and power supplies incorporating control transformers ) - Part -4: Particular requirements and tests for isolating transformers and power supply units incorporating isolating transformers ) - Part -6: Particular requirements and tests for safety isolating transformers and power supply units incorporating safety isolating transformers ) - Part -9: Particular requirements and tests for transformers and power supply units for class III handlamps for tungsten filament lamps ) - Part -: Particular requirements for constant voltage transformers ) - Part -: Particular requirements and tests for auto transformers and power supply units incorporating auto transformers ) - Part -: Particular requirements for isolating transformers for the supply of medical locations ) - Part -: Particular requirements and tests for small reactors ) Power transformers, power supply units, reactors and similar products EMC requirements Power transformers Part : Dry-type transformers Standards for variable-ratio transformers with moving contacts perpendicular to the coiling direction Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4-: Testing and measurement techniques Overview of IEC 6-4 series Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 6-: Generic standards Emission standard for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 6-4: Generic standards Emission standard for industrial environments Instrument transformers Part : Current transformers ) VDE classification. 6 UL CSA C. ASME JIS Title Specialty transformers Industrial control equipment Molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and circuit breaker enclosures Power units other than CLASS Dry-type general purpose and power transformers Low-voltage transformers Medical electrical equipment, Part : General requirements for safety (IEC 66, EN 66, VDE 7-) Electrical equipment for use in CLASS I and II, Division and CLASS III hazardous (Classified) locations Terminal blocks 486A-486B Wire connectors 486E Equipment wiring terminals for use with aluminum and/or copper conductors Enclosures for electrical equipment. Non-environmental considerations -- No Specialty transformers -- No Industrial control equipment -- No Molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and circuit breaker enclosures -- No General use power supplies A7. / B Elevator and escalator electrical equipment C 8-4- Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear; Contactors and motor-starters 6/8 Siemens LV 6

263 Siemens AG Appendix Quality management The quality management system of our I BT LV Business Unit complies with the international standard EN ISO 9. The products and systems listed in this catalog are marketed using a VDE-approved quality management system according to ISO 9. VDE certificate Siemens AG Industry Sector Building Technologies Division Low Voltage Distribution (I BT LV) Reg. No.: 47/QM/.6 Certificates Standards and approvals Information on the certificates available (CE, UL, CSA, FM, shipping authorizations) for low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation products can be found on the Internet at: In the Entry List you can use the certificate type (general product approval, explosion protection, test certificates, shipbuilding,...) as a filter criterion. Approval requirements valid in different countries Siemens low-voltage switchgear and controlgear are designed, manufactured and tested according to the relevant German standards (DIN and VDE), IEC publications and European standards (EN) as well as CSA and UL standards. The standards assigned to the single devices are stated in the relevant parts of this catalog. As far as is economically viable, the requirements of the various regulations valid in other countries are also taken into account in the design of the equipment. In some countries (see table below), an approval is required for certain low-voltage switchgear and controlgear components. Depending on the market requirements, these components have been submitted for approval to the authorized testing institutes. In some cases, CSA for Canada and UL for the USA only approve special switchgear versions. Such special versions are listed separately from the standard versions in the individual parts of this catalog. For this equipment, partial limitations of the maximum permissible voltages, currents and ratings can be imposed, or special approval and, in some cases, special identification is required. For use on board ship, the specifications of the marine classification societies must be observed (see table below). In some cases, they require type tests of the components to be approved. 6 Testing bodies, approval identification and approval requirements Country Canada ) USA ) China Government-appointed or private, officially CSA UL UL CQC recognized testing bodies (USA) Approval symbol s c u cu c UUS c uus For more information about UL and CSA on request. ) For guide numbers and file numbers for the approvals, visit our website at u U c UUS c uus Approval requirements Remarks UL and CSA are authorized to grant approvals according to Canadian or US regulations. Please note: these approvals are frequently not recognized and additional approval often has to be obtained from the national testing authority. CCC Siemens LV 6 6/9

264 Appendix Siemens AG Siemens contacts Contact partner at Siemens Industry At Siemens Industry, more than 8 people are resolutely pursuing the same goal: long-term improvement of your competitive ability. We are committed to this goal. Thanks to our commitment, we continue to set new standards. In all industries worldwide. At your service locally, around the globe for consulting, sales, training, service, support, spare parts... on the entire Industry range. Your personal contact can be found in our Contacts Database at: You start by selecting a Product group, Country, City, Service. 6 6/ Siemens LV 6

265 Siemens AG Appendix Solution partners - Automation, Power Distribution and PLM The products and systems from Siemens Industry Automation and Drive Technologies offer the ideal platform for all automation applications. Under the name Siemens Solution Partner, selected system integrators operate around the world as uniformly qualified solution providers for the portfolio of Siemens automation, power distribution and product lifecycle management products. Day after day, they utilize their qualified product and system know-how as well as their excellent industry expertise to your advantage for all requirements. The Solution Partner emblem is a guarantee of quality. The basis for this is to be found in four defined quality features: Solution quality: A good result in every case based on proven solution knowhow. Expert quality: Certified technical competence guarantees maximum efficiency. Project quality: Straight to the goal with proven project experience. Product range quality: Comprehensive portfolio for state-of-the-art solutions from a single source. Solution partners Solution Partner Finder The Siemens Solution Partner Program helps you to find the optimum partner for your specific requirements. Support is provided by the Solution Partner Finder, a comprehensive online database that showcases the profiles of all our solution partners. You can convince yourself of the competence of the respective Solution Partner by means of the references provided. The following search criteria are possible: Country Technology Sector Company Zip code Once you have located a partner, you are only one small step from contacting them. You can locate the Solution Partner Finder as follows: Additional information on the Siemens Solution Partner Program is available online at: 6 Siemens LV 6 6/

266 Appendix Online Services Information and ordering options available on the Internet and DVD Siemens Building Technologies on the web Siemens AG The Siemens Division Building Technologies offers the full range of products and solutions for secure and energy-efficient buildings and infrastructures from building automation and heating, ventilation and air-conditioning systems (HLK) to fire protection, security, low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation technology. Extensive information about all products, systems and services and support services is available in a compact and clear format on the Internet at: Product selection with the interactive catalog CA Detailed information together with convenient interactive functions: The interactive catalog CA covers more than 8 products and thus provides a full summary of the Siemens Industry product base. Here you will find everything that you need to solve tasks in the fields of automation, switchgear, installation and drives. All information is linked into a user interface which is easy to work with and intuitive. After selecting the product of your choice you can order at the press of a button, by fax or by online link. Information on the interactive catalog CA can be found in the Internet under: or on DVD. 6 Easy Shopping with the Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the virtual department store of Siemens AG on the Internet. Here you have access to a huge range of products clearly and informatively presented in electronic catalogs. Data transfer via EDIFACT allows the whole procedure, from selection over ordering through to order tracking, to be carried out online over the Internet. A range of functions offer comprehensive support. These include powerful search functions that make it easy to find the required products, which can then be immediately checked for availability. Customer-specific discounting and compilation of tenders are possible online, as is checking the status of your order (Tracking & Tracing). You can find the Industry Mall on the Internet at: 6/ Siemens LV 6

267 Siemens AG Appendix Service & Support Service covering the entire life cycle Overview Modernization & Optimization Modernization and Optimization Planning & Design Technical Consulting Online Support Technical Support Technical Consulting Support in the planning and designing of your project from detailed actual-state analysis, target definition and consulting on product and system questions right to the creation of the automation solution. Spare Parts and Repairs Operation & Maintenance Field Service Engineering Support Configuration & Development Installation & Commissioning Engineering Support Support in configuring and developing with customer-oriented services from actual configuration to implementation of the automation project. Our Service & Support are available worldwide to help you with every aspect of Siemens automation and drive technology. We offer on-site support for every phase of the life cycle of your machines and plants in more than countries. Round the clock. Field Service Every step of the way, you have access to an experienced team of specialists and their combined expertise. Thanks to regular training and the close cooperation of key employees around the globe, we are able to offer reliable services for a huge range of options. With Field Service, we offer services for startup and maintenance essential for ensuring system availability. Online Support The comprehensive information system available round the clock via Internet ranging from Product Support and Service & Support services to Support Tools in the Shop. lowvoltage/support Spare parts and Repais In the operating phase of a machine or automation system, we offer comprehensive repair and spare parts services ensuring the highest degree of plant availability. Technical Support Competent consulting in technical questions covering a wide range of customer-oriented services for all our products and systems. lowvoltage/technical-support Modernization and Optimization After startup or during the operating phase, additional potential for inceasing the productiviy or for reducing costs often arises. For this purpose, we offer you high-quality services in optimization and upgrading. 6 Contact information is available in the Internet at: Siemens LV 6 6/